Home
        DL.2 Digital Light User Manual
         Contents
1.        1024 W x 768 H                               106 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Horizontal Panorama Collage  Array Array Aspect Maximum Recommended DL 2  NEM  W x H  Ratio L      5 Resolution  W x H                                     Vertical Panoramas Collage  Array Array Aspect Maximum Recommended Image DL 2  Configuration  W x H  Ratio Resolution  W x H  Units    m    Modifier 1  Selects what type of collage array to use     DMX Array DMX Array DMX Array  Value  W x H  Value  W x H  Value  W x H                                                                 2x2    E GNE M M NL MM  L 16 255   Reserved  defaults  edd    Modifier 2  Selects which portion of the grid a particular DL2 will display  DMX values 0 15 step  through grid pattern selected by the Modifier 1 parameter  DMX values 16 255 default to the  upper left corner of the grid        NM    03m  e w  e  3    NA  NAM       DL 2 User Manual 107    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Modifier 3  Adjusts edge blending between the selected portion of the image being projected  by the fixture and adjacent portions being projected by other fixtures     Sa   S  Adjusts the intensity of the blended areas only  This is to have the ability to compensate  0 127    for any hotspots that may occur in the blended areas   128 160 Displays the DL 2 output in its cropped state but without edge blending applied     161 191 Displays the DL 2 output in its cropped state without 
2.        DL 2 User Manual 213    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Cartoon Edge   Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity   Color DeConverge   Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down 39  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to RBG  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB 43  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44    intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection   Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45    42    makes selected intensity transparent  129 255  inverts transparency   Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3  controls raindrop rate   Effect  192 Mode 2 Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and 47  Mod3 sets overall color range  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2    Mod1 x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used     Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 49 63    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation    Mod1  
3.        sssssssssssssse seems 130  Preloaded  Stock CONCEDE uesivdtbasupe poo cde Shade EU RPUPEDQI MEE MILIONI dUnE E VETP SUE MEME 130  Custom Jser CONTENE tec uedtuaer n erm Ut pat afltex des a wa poe bn UR eMe a RN 130  Medidas mucius ied amat eeushebord o Mod M MD Nt Eal 130  SD ODECE FICS RUM 131  Viewing Server Configuration Data               sssssssrresrrrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrene 131  VIEWING CONTENE icut tes titio seen iO icis uestis inten tad c vno a ote 131  VIEWING FOIJETS 3x icd uce ius unpaid uiu ag uaa ae anicaitadud Vat aided ee Ub LA Lodi dated 132  ari datei ccm E I T UU TT 132  Managing User Content Lisci aun sexu unus dues vana var uauxcEEsEuEaus ERE RVRSERRBERERREERENE DT 133       xvi DL 2 User Manual    Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders                           eeeeeeeeee 133    Assigning DMX Values to User Content                ssssssssssssse emen 133  Assigning DMX Values Automatically                  sess mnn 133  Editing User Content DMX Values             cisssssssesss enne nnn 134  Vald  Burm                                      134   Moving User Content Files and Folders         ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 135  Downloading Content from a DL 2 Fixture to Your Local Drive                           136  Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a DL 2 Fixture                       seeeeee 136   Moving Files Between FiXtUFes         aoseusnsunssuanusuusuuZuRSRRSREARRERRRRRRERRRRRRRRRARRARRS 137   Arc
4.      1 i      6      ee Sooo Display LED     Enter       Active Screen displays the  Multidirectional navigation button currently selected screen      Function will automatically reverse when fixture is inverted     The LCD screen displays the menu arranged with a series of Menu Tabs along the left side for  accessing configuration screens and options on the currently active screen  Clicking on one of  the Tab Select buttons selects the tab to the right of it on the screen     The large Multi directional button controls movement between fields  The Escape button to  the left cancels a selection and the Enter button to the right selects and stores a selection        DL 2 User Manual 19    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Functionality for each of these three buttons automatically reverses when the fixture is rotated  to keep operation consistent  You can also manually set this option  see Display Options on  page 28      The fields in the Active Screen display current configuration settings and uses drop down  boxes  numeric up down selectors  and other user interface options to select in editable fields     LCD Display Adjustment Buttons    The four LCD Display Adjustment buttons next to o    Menu i  the LCD screen control and provide visual adjustments             e Menu Select  Start    LCD Display Power Button 1 Channel    ID L  Display LED    1    for the menu display   o    LCD Power    The button nearest the green LED is the LCD display       power button  Holding it 
5.      e The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  letter    N    or coloured black     e The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with  the letter  L  or coloured red     WARNING   Class 1 equipment   This equipment must be earthed     Vatic Fitter Heads Information   Danmark  Advarsel  Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock   Vigtigt   EM    Lederne med gul groen isolation maa kun tilsluttes en klemme maerket D ever      Back Panel Connections  The DL 2 fixture   s back panel provides ports for     5 pin DMX Data In and Data Out  see Setting up a Standard DMX Link on page 10 for  more information       Ethernet to connect to other DL 2 fixtures and your computer running the Content  Management Application  CMA  software on a fixture link  see Setting up an Ethernet  Fixture Link on page 11        Two USB ports for connecting peripheral drives to assist with troubleshooting       6 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    e RGBHV  VGA and S Video In options for video input       Camera Out provides S Video output from the internal camera to another DL 2 fixture or  other external video output device     CAUTION   To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty  do not  physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time     Receive LED indicates   Link LED indicates hardware  DMX data coming in connection via ethernet    Activity LED indicates CMA    Transmi
6.     FxiMode 01 02 03 0  i S Rotation X 32767 Y 33067 Z 33142      Scale X  127 Y 127 Z  127   L  Position X 32767 Y 32767 Z 32767    e Chapter 9  Graphic Functions  Synchronizing Content on page 77        26    DL 2 User Manual    DMX  Raui Screen  You can view the DMX values of all fixtures on    being received by the fixture     Jg   the link  The Raw Tab displays every DMX value E 3 Sn d  for Channels 001 512 in lines of eight DMX E o 010     020  values each per screen  The Offset number at m g  the beginning of each line indicates the first ie D 050  DMX channel with a value displayed on that line  5   m  Use the scroll bar at the left of the offset SS ra  number to scroll through all the values  R i  The Refresh Rate is the rate at which DMX is     i30    With Refresh Timer set to On  you see the raw  DMX values updated instantly     CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Refresh Rate   25         128000 128 000 000 128 128 000 000  000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000  000 000 255 001 000 000 000 000 000 000  000 000 255 000 000 000 000 000 000 000  000 000 000 000 000 000 128 128 000 128  000 128 000 118 052 000 000 000 001 001  000 000 000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001  000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000  128 000 128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128  000 128 000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000     000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001 000 000    001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 126 000  128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128 000 128  000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000 QOO 255    Refresh Tim
7.     The Media folder must contain subfolders  and valid files may go into those subfolders       Only objects with a  x extension are allowed in the Objects folder  no subfolders      Creating Content Backup Archive   Backups are created using the Content Archive feature  An Content Archive file is a  compressed file containing all the User Content from a single fixture along with the assigned  DMX values for folders and files     To create a Content Archive    l  In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane   2  Select the Server with the content you want to backup in the right pane     3  Select Create Content Archive from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or  the right click popup list     Deploying a Content Archive   Deploying the Content Archive you created restores the user content to a fixture  To replicate  this content to other fixtures on the link  use the Clone Content feature  see Cloning User  Content on page 140         DL 2 User Manual 139    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Cloning User Content    Cloning is a file transfer operation where all the User Content of a single fixture is replicated  across one or more other fixtures  Cloning preserves all user content naming and DMX values   This allows you  for example  to send the custom content for a specific show to all the fixtures  used in that show with one operation     To clone user content   1  In the Management Client Window select All Server in the le
8.     When you launch the CMA  it automatically finds and identifies all DL 2 fixtures on the fixture  link     Note  To avoid problems with fixture communication over the ethernet link   disable all firewall programs on your computer when using the CMA        14 DL 2 User Manual    Configuring DL 2 Fixtures    CHAPTEH 2  oetup and Configuration    Before programming the DL 2 fixtures from a DMX512 console  you need to       Identify the DMX Source for the fixture      Select the Protocol type to determine the DMX channel range this fixture will utilize      Select a Fixture Number to identify this fixture on the DL 2 fixture link  required if you will    be synchronizing output between fixtures        Assign a valid Start Channel  the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels    designated by the console for this fixture     You can configure fixtures directly using the DL 2 menu system or remotely using the Content    Management Application     Setup Configuration Using the Menu System    All setup parameters are located on the DL2  fixture s menu DMX Screen  For detailed  information on using the DL 2 Menu System   see Chapter 3  The DL 2 Menu System on page  page 19     DMX Source defines the source of DMX data  and has two options   e DMX512     Data is transmitted over  standard DMX cables   e Art Net    Data is transmitted over    Ethernet cables using the Art  Net protocol   Set the number of DMX Universes  and      E        source      DMX512   z   Protocol    
9.     oO  ER    35  36  7    3          CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Effect Mode    DNA Name Definition  Value    Edge  Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Enhances d    Reduces Color detection  picture elements Contrast    sensitivity    Color DeConverge separates image color Moves Red Moves Green   Moves Blue   components and offsets them from original component component  a component up   position down and right  down and left    Defi i  Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used Not Used    RGB Swap to BGR Red to Blue Blue to Red  RGB Swap to RBG    Ra     Green to Blue  Blue to Green  RGB Swap to GRB Red to Green  Green to Red    AA Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to Selects Color   Selects zero Controls  color Scheme intensity point fading    Defines  Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity   Selects Color Controls    Intensit  transparent Scheme ica Transparency    AG Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a Controls size    seeds random controls  liquid surface speed   generator raindrop rate    Mask Color applies color to a selected mask  Green Blue  shape  129 Edge Fade Color applies color to a selected nen Blue  Edge Fade parameter    Mask Color and Edge Fade Color applies the  130   same color to both the selected Mask and Green Blue  Image Edge Fade parameters    131   Background Color selects background color    Back I I th  132 HEROFOHHEUEODI Sole GSQUDH EEG Red Speed Green Speed   Blue Speed  background color    I nerator a
10.    Mod 2 adjusts color shift  Reserved  defaults to Off 11 255    108   Visual Mode   Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum   0 255   0 100  Modifier 1   109   Visual Mode   Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum   0 255   0 100  Modifier 2       Off  no effects selection   6   oO    CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values  1  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values  2  Mod1  cyan  Mod2 magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values  3  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels  4  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue  RGB Add 2 All Pixels  5   110 Tid Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   aa RGB Add  non black pixels  s   Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue  RGB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   RGB Swap to BGR  Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color   Mod   red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   Solarize 2  if color value    DMX  invert color  10  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   Solarize  if color value    DMX  set color to 0  44  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     196 DL 2 User Manual       APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling   Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    All or Nothing 
11.    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  speed and direction  A DMX value of 128  50     no  adjustment  DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255   10096    fastest speed  DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction  from no adjustment to 0   fastest speed     Texture Ripple  Vertical M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   23    Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the y axis  without affecting the underlying object     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  speed and direction  A DMX value of 128  50     no  adjustment  DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255   10096    fastest speed  DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction  from no adjustment to 0   fastest speed        DL 2 User Manual 115    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Tiling M   Object Effect        Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   48    Tiling varies the number of times a media file is applied as a texture to an object  This effect  works best on objects that have an undisrupted surface area     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis  A value of 12
12.    d Name Definition  Value      0  Safe noeffectsselecion       Safe noeffectsseletion     no effects selection        N   NA   NM      OMY  RGB inverse    On   Magna   Yelow   4  RGB Ada  Al Pixels 0 Red   Green   Bue   5  FGB Ada 2  AN Pixels  0 Red   Green   Bue   6  RGB Ada  AII Nor black Pixels   Red   Green   Bwe   7 RGBSwapiGBR Redio Green   Green to Blue   Blue to Red   8  RGB RGBSwaptoBRG     to BRG   Blue to Green  to Green    E3      m 1 If color value    DMX value  invert  solor Green Blue     10   Solarize 2 Ifcoor value  gt  DNX invetcol    Red   Green   mue   T Solarize 8 fco value  lt  DNX  setoolorio0   Rea   Green   Bue  12  Solarize 4 foor value  gt  DNX  setoolorio0   Red   Green   Bue  18 _ DotP and Resample   Res   oreen   me  me S ee KCN    E or Nothing If color value  gt  mod value   Green Blue  color   255  else color   0    RGB Invert From Red to   From Green to    Blue to  Inverted Red   Inverted Green  Inverted Blue   From Red to   From Green to  From Blue to    POVER AO wap TO DE Inverted Red   Inverted Green  Inverted Blue    RGB  Invert and Swap to BRG PONSE dba   From Blue to  P Inverted Red crum Inverted Blue          80 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Effect Mode Adjustments  pii Name Definition  Value  Horizontal Vertical Comparison  20   Edge Detect Color l   j  search size search size threshold  Horizontal Vertical Comparison  21   Edge Detect B W l j  search size search size threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal Ampli
13.    eese 229  Ap  ndice E  Informaci  n Importante De Seguridad                           sees 230  Appendice E  Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza                    essen 231  Vigtig SikkerhedsinfOoFtmatlol 35st e eo a usur ue Dee tet ta bae UNS 231       DL 2 User Manual xix       DL 2 User Manual    Chapter I     Product Overview    This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture  and the Content Management Application software     The DL 2  Digital Light 2  fixture merges video projection and automated lighting technologies  with a DMX controllable digital media server housed in a moving yoke fixture  The built in 32 bit  Graphics Engine utilizes Windows XP Embedded and DirectX application programming  interface to provide extensive image control of up to three 3 D graphic objects     DL 2 fixtures use DMX512 protocol to control hardware functions like pan  tilt  and zoom  as well  as media control functions including loading images and movies and mapping them onto 3 D  graphical objects  The internal graphics engine lets you manipulate position  scale  rotation   apply visual effects and color mix each graphic object  You can create and control up to three of  these objects and then apply global effects to the composite image    The DL 2 fixture provides a fully equipped internal digital camera and IR illuminator to input live  video to its own graphic engine or to another DL 2 fixture or device  While combining camera  and light from the sam
14.   32255  All Position DMX values   32768  50         Object 1  Y Position DMX value   33269       60 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale           The Z Position parameter moves your object along the z axis with 16 bit precision    The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the object on the z axis  Values below the  DMX midpoint move the object away from the viewer and appears to become smaller  and  object above the DMX midpoint move the object toward the viewer and appears to become    larger   Default DMX Value  32768  50     object centered in frame    Tip  This parameter can create a zoom effect  Remember that by moving an object  you can  obscure other objects or move it behind your viewpoint where it is no longer visible     F          nll    Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1  Z Position DMX value   31884  All Position DMX values   32768  50      a  2       Object 1  Z Position DMX value   32822 Object 1  Z Position DMX value   33144       DL 2 User Manual 61    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale       62 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 8   Graphic Functions  Opacity and    ffects    You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to  each individual Graphic Object     The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define  Parameters  for composite image intensity and effects are described in Chapter 10  Global Functions on page  79    
15.   Mainboard Maximum  Temperature  Temperature    Mainboard Temperature Reset    Pan Invert    Configuration Value Options    Standard   170 channel footprint  Dual   132 channels  Single   94 channels    On selects manual focus  On selects manual zoom  On restores fixture defaults    Allows fixture name of up to 26 characters    Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Iris   Zoom and Focus function    Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for all  motion functions     Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Pan and  Tilt function    Read Only  Pressing Reset restores Lamp hours to 0    Read only  Read only  Read only    Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature  Read only    On Inverts pan positioning    Off reverts to default position          146    DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Configuration Item Configuration Value Options  On swaps pan and tilt positioning   Pan Tilt Swa MD  Off reverts to default positioning   On access the Projector menu  P t   EOE EOT EN Off reverts to DL 2 menu   Projector Defaults Selecting this option automatically restores projector defaults  Projector Focus Value      External accepts input from an external video source  Projector Input        Internal accepts input from the graphics engine  Projector Input Selection Yes allows projector input to be switched via DMX  by DMX No disables projector input switching via DMX  Always Onturns lamp on when the fixture is p
16.   Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3 46  controls raindrop rate           198 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and  Mod3 sets overall color range  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2  Mod1  x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used   Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 49 63  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation   410 Effect Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Mode 1 Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation   Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect 0 75 255    444   Effect Mode 1   Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no   9 555   4 490  Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 t
17.   Mod1 fades from original color to red 3  tones  Mod2 controls saturation   Gray maker  Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4  of gray  Mod2 adjusts contrast          DL 2 User Manual 183    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Gray maker2  Always gray  Mod1   brightness   Mod 2   contrast  Posterizer  Mod1 reduces color detail  Mod2  adjusts contrast   Color to Black  amp  White  Mod1 fades color RGB   0 to B W  50  to white  100   Mod2  not  used    Visual Mode   Fire Gradient  Mod1fades original to converted  Mod2 not used  reserved   Negative Art  Mod1 fades from original image to  converted image  Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128   subtracts green from 129 255   Exposure Control  Mod1 adjusts color contrast   Mod 2 adjusts color shift  Reserved  defaults to Off 11 255    7o   Visual Mode   Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum  0 255   0 100  Modifier 1   71 visual voae Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum  0 255   0 100  Modifier 2       Off  no effects selection o0 r 9   CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values  1  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values  2  Mod1  cyan  Mod2 magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values  3  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels  4  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue  RGB Add 2 All Pixels  5   72 Tul Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   mer RGB Add  non black pixels  s   Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue  R
18.   Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    C2    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area   Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center   Mod3  z direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture  center  Mod3  subpicture size    C2    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center   Mod3 lens size    oO    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center   Mod3   lens size          DL 2 User Manual 201    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Cartoon Edge   Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity   Color DeConverge   Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down 39  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to RBG  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB 43  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44    intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection   Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45    42    makes selected intensity transparent  129 255  inverts transparency   Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size 
19.   Protective eyewear      Mild glass cleaner  containing no ammonia  and a soft  lint free cotton cloth    WARNING   AN This fixture must be serviced by qualified personnel     The information listed in this chapter is intended to  assist qualified personnel only     Pan and Tilt Locking    The DL 2 fixture is equipped with mechanical pan and tilt locking latches to stabilize the fixture  for shipping or servicing  There is a single pan lock position and three tilt lock positions          Tilt Lock          N  N  SL   LJ    sr   2  A                                     Pan Lock          DL 2 User Manual 149    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Maintaining the Filtering System    Like all high quality video projection units  the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from  excessive amounts of glycol fog  mineral oil  and smoke  DL 2 fixtures incorporate multiple air  filters to reduce these risks to a minimum  however  the user must follow these guidelines to  ensure continued operation of the fixture       Air filters  both fixture and projector  should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis   When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used  we recommend at  least a weekly check       Do not situate DL 2 in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or  mineral oil hazer     e Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fog and mineral oil     Filter Warnings   The DL 2 menu system displays a series of filter statu
20.  100    Moves object down from center of display 0 36767  32768  50    Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768    Moves object up from center of display escas 5 100 51 100    Moves object nearer from center of display 0  S rem  Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 32768 50    Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769  51 100 100  display 65535          DL 2 User Manual 217    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol       218 DL 2 User Manual    Appendix B     MSpeed Conversion Table    This table lists the MSpeed  motor  movement times and their corresponding  DMX controller values     If you have a numeric type DMX controller  use the Value Decimal  dec   column  If you have  a fader type DMX controller  use the Value Percentage     column  If your DMX controller  allows you to program hex values  use the Value  hex  column      594   217   85 DO   017   253   99   FD    625 216   85   DB    09   252   99 FC   021   251   98 FB  2454   177   69 BI   025   250   98 FA 25 17   1 6   69   BO  0 29   249   98   F9  2580  1 5   69 AF   2645   174   68   AE  2740  173   68 AD     047   246   96 F6   055   245   96   F5    900   208   82   DO  063   244   96   F4   2980  169   66   A9  10 17   205   80   CD   3049   168   66   A8  094   241  1088  204   80   CC   05   240  1099  203   80 CB  2 27  2 46  3865  157   62   9D  2 86   307   228   89   E4 4023  155   61     329   227   89   E3  4104  154   60   9A   352   226   89   E2    1761  189   74   BD    418
21.  10096  2 maximum blue saturation     Color DeConverge M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   39    This effect option separates the different color components of an image and offsets them from  the original image position     Modifier 1  Moves the image   s red component up from O  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum distance from original position     Modifier 2  Moves the image   s green component down and right from 02 no adjustment to 255   100     maximum adjustment     Modifier 3  Moves the image s blue component down and left from 0   no adjustment to 255   10096    maximum blue saturation     Colorize Gray Scale M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   44    This option maps a selected pixel intensity to a selected color scheme  A variety of color  schemes simulate effects like thermography  This is especially effective effect when applied to  input from the internal camera     Modifier 1  Selects from color schemes along a range of values from 0   255     Modifier 2  Sets the zero point of the color intensity level from 0   no intensity to 255  10096       maximum intensity     Modifier 3  Fades from original color scheme to new color scheme using selected intensity        96 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    DotP and Resample M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   13    This option applies an algorithm that pixelates  and solarizes the image  It also m
22.  12  Fixture Motion Functions    Projector Control    Control Parameter Projector Options  These Control parameter options remotely access and operate the internal projector   s menu  system       DMX  Value Control Option Description  Range    These options control the directional buttons on the projector  menu display and cannot be activated until you set the Dimmer    205 208   Projector Floor Orientation These commands activate the Projector s setting for specific  mounting or projection alternatives     l i Once set  these commands maintain their value until reset even  209 212   Projector Celing Orientation after shutdown and re homing  For example  if the Control    parameter is set to switch the unit to Ceiling orientation  then the  213 216   Projector Front Projection unit will remain in Ceiling orientation until another command is  sent to switch back to Floor  This allows the Control parameter to    revert to another value without losing the orientation or mirroring  status     Video input can be utilized with either RGBHV or VGA but not  to Projector both  You can select between RGBHV and VGA in the menu  system   see DMX Control Screen on page 25   RGBHV is the  factory default     Input from S Video In  229 232  camera to Camera Out  to Before using DMX to change DL 2 inputs  you must enable the    217 220   Projector Rear Projection    Graphics Engine Projector Input by DMX option in the menu system  see    Set Projector Screen on page 29  or through the CMA  
23.  2    Center of Object 3    Default DMX Value  0   Perspective view  Spherical Coordinates with the focus at the center  of the 3 D space     Perspective Vieui  Spherical Coordinates  This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space with a perspective view of a 3 D space  Viewpoints are  located in terms of X  Y and Z positions located on a sphere surrounding the image     Y           See         LAE      E cm        DEOBAL     wIEVVFECOCHSNIT        Global Viewpoint set with X  Y  and Z DL 2 output displayed with global  positions all equal to zero  viewpoint shown at left     Perspective Vieui  Cartesian Coordinates  This Viewpoint mode parameter creates a 3 D space with a perspective view  Viewpoints are  located in terms of rectangular X  Y and Z positions describing a location in this space     Orthogonal Vieui  Cartesian Coordinates   This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space without perspective  Viewpoint are located in terms of  rectangular X  Y and Z positions describing a location in this space  In this case  the composite  image is always flat        DL 2 User Manual 89    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Viewpoint Position X    The Viewpoint Position X parameter determines the x component of the viewpoint position to  the target you have specified in the Viewpoint Mode parameter  The horizontal angle is the  angle around the vertical  y  axis  Heading is another name for this angle     Default DMX Value  32768   center    DMX values above center of the range move counterclock
24.  2 fixture        122 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter I3     Live Video Input and Control    The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video from an external source or its own  integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide a  direct digital video feed option     Live Video Sources    Internal Camera  Every DL 2 is equipped with a internal    Digital Eye video camera projector infrared  IR  sensor    capable of capturing live video even in yi Y       video camera and IR illuminator    blackout conditions     The camera is mounted on the front  of the DL 2 near the projector iris to  point wherever the DL 2 fixture is         directed     DL 2  front view        All of the camera functions can be  controlled via a DMX console  see Controlling the Internal Camera Input on page 125      Other Video Sources   A DL 2 fixture can also project other live video sources connected to the DL 2 fixture s RGBHV   VGA  or S Video input ports  With S Video input  the live video can be further enhanced and  manipulated by the DL 2 s graphics engine     Note  You can configure the graphics engine to capture video from an external  source or the internal camera but not from both at the same time        DL 2 User Manual 123    CHAPTER 13  Live Video Input and Control    Live Video Connection Options    The DL 2 fixture has video connectors for RGBHV  VGA and S Video on its rear panel  as shown    in the following figure     O    G  00000    erui aid TE cs       VGA input
25.  24  25  26  2   8 39   240  5    2  40  25          46 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    Media File    The Media File parameter lets you identify which Stock or User media file to apply  map  as a  texture on the selected 3  D object  You can supplement the large library of Stock video loops  and still images with Custom files  This parameter selects media files from within the folder  defined by the Media Folder parameter     For a reference of media files available as stock content with your DL 2 fixture  go to the link for  the Stock Content Guide on http    www highend com  support  digital lightin   di2supportguide    You can also view thumbnail images of media files in the CMA   see Viewing  Files on page 132        Default DMX Value  0   No file selected    Tip  You can preview a visual display of the media files loaded on a DL 2  fixture in the Content Management Application s thumbnails view    see Viewing Content on page 131  or in the File Tab of a DL 2 fixture  menu display  see File Screen on page 30      Defining a Media File Segment    You can define any portion of a video media file to play using the In Frame and Out Frame  parameters  By default  the In Frame is the beginning of the media file and the Out Frame is the  end of the file  Media files can have different lengths     In Frame and Out Frame Parameters    You can select any segment of a media file for playback by assigning an In Frame value as a  start point and a
26.  512 in the Start Channel field to set a valid start channel for the  protocol you have chosen   e Standard protocol   1 343      Dual Protocol   1 381  e Single Protocol   1 419  For more on choosing valid DL 2 start channels  see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 35     You can assign each fixture a unique Fixture I D number from 1 255  This allows the fixture to  be identified on the DL 2 ethernet fixture link for tasks like synchronizing playback between  DL 2 fixtures and uploading custom content with the Content Management Application  CMA    You can manually set this number in the menu or through the CMA  see Fixture Identification on  page 128  For more on DL 2 Ethernet fixture links  see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on  page 11        DL 2 User Manual 25    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    DMX_Protocol Tab    This tab displays the current DMX value being received from a console for each parameter after    any conversion  such as internal self test or protocol conversion  The DMX parameters are    grouped into general categories  each with a separate tab  For more information on individual  parameters and their DMX value ranges  see Appendix A  DL 2 DMX Protocol on page 169     DMX_Protocol_Motion Screen   The Motion tab displays parameters associated  with fixture movement  projector control and  integrated camera functionality     For more information on specific Motion and  Camera parameters  see       Chapter 12  Fixture Motion Functions on  page 11
27.  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    Solid Color RGB   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    RGB Invert   Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR   Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG   Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green  Edge Detect Color   Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold   Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Vertical   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Medium  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue          DL 2 User Manual 197    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Chromakey Inverse  Coarse  Select key color  usin
28.  Content Archive restores user content to the server from the backup   see page  139        Upgrade Software allows you to upgrade fixture software  For more information on  upgrade options  see Upgrading Software on page 141        DL 2 User Manual 129    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Client Window Content Organization    The media server on each fixture has Mac OS X    v   All Fixtures  All Configuration  v B Susan  2      Content    User Content     T User Objects   gt  Stock Content    a file system that holds the movies   images  and 3 D objects that make up  the content that the server uses     These files  folders  and their DMX  values are collectively known as the     Content    on the fixture     The Client Management Window    organizes and identifies content by Configuration     CE Stock Objects    Windows OS     All Servers  4 servers       J User Content  ff  User Objects       Stock Content  fe  Stock Objects  ld one  1      A three  3     brian  5       gt   All Configuration       source  preloaded Stock content or  custom User content  and type  Media files or 3D Object files      NOTE  Tree structure differs slightly on the two platform versions  In the Mac Finder   Media files are User Content and Stock Content options  and a configuration  option appears under the server  In Windows Explorer  configuration  information for the server is located directly by selecting the server     Preloaded Stock Content   A large library of Stock Me
29.  DMX values are assigned as follows     DMX values from 1 38 select from the stock Media collections that shipped with your DL 2  fixture     A DMX value of 39 is reserved for a Setup and Test folder     DMX Values 40 239 are reserved for assignment to Custom folders containing user Media  collections    A DMX value of 255 selects the live video feed from the integrated video camera capture or  S Video input   see Chapter 13  Live Video Input and Control on page 123 for more  information      Default DMX Value    1  HES Core Media files        DL 2 User Manual 45    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    Media Folder Descriptions    DMX l  Media Folder Name Content Description  HES Core Media Files   Premier High End Systems video loop collection    HES Digital Aerials 1 i ad images and animations  designed specifically for aerial    s  7    D gt     HES Textures Video loop textures  HES_Foliage Collection of abstract and realistic foliage and floral video loops    Beacon DigiGobos Digital video loops  promotional  Amorphous Digi gobos   Digital animations  promotional  Digital video loops  promotional    2  r   Q  2  mt    Live video input from internal camera or external device    HES Religious Religious themed video loops    Nature stills  foliage and flowers    HES Gothic Set of themed video loops  HES Digital Aerials _ 2  Digital still images and animations  designed specifically for aerial effects  Si    10  11  12  13  14  15  16  17  18  19  20  21  22  23 
30.  Frame Out Frame    You can create a segment anywhere between  the beginning and the end of a media file   The In Frame does not have to precede the       Out Frame     To skip a segment in the center of a media  file  set the In Frame to a point following the Example 2   Out Frame  The file will play from the In p le 0    e  Frame to the end and then start at the begin  J Out Frame In Frame l  ning of the file and play to the Out Frame        When you create a segment in this way  you    may notice a jump as playback skips from Start    the end of the file to the beginning     Defining Playback    After selecting and defining a media file segment to display on a 3 D object  you can choose  from several Playback Modes and assign a Playback Speed     Playback Mode    A Playback Mode parameter for each 3 D image allows several playback options     Default DMX Value  0   Plays forward in a continuous loop    DMX _  l Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame  Play forward looping    l i  setting  looping continuously  Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame  1 Play forward once     setting  and holds on the last frame    Stops playback at the frame currently playing    Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame  Play forward once if opacity  gt  O setting  and holds on the last frame  Plays only when the  content opacity value is greater than zero     Plays media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame  Play forward if opaci
31.  Message Detail   Noies        This message will end  PROJ STATUS COOLING when the fixture has    The projector must cool down reached the recom   before it can re strike the lamp   ended operational  temperature  Info_Status tab only ania he Ts    This message does not Motion Shut Down through the menu  appear in large format m system  Test Home  Motion Shut Down The Motion Systems is in shut   Motion All Home   Status down mode  To return to normal screen  the CMA   see  operation  power cycle or page 144  or from  perform a HOME ALL the DMX console  see  page 120    Check the Ribbon  cable connections at  the camera and the  head card   the Blue    Projector Temperature  Status    TT i side should be facing  Camera Communication CAMERA COMM ERROR The system is unable to    Error communicate with the Camera    9UU     Use the camera s    zoom buttons to check  that the camera has  power           158 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15    Maintenance and Troubleshooting     issue  Large Format Message  Message Detail   1 Noies        Filter Missing Error FILTER MISSING ERROR   Filter not present  Insert Filter     Service Filter Error i ici  FILTER SERVICE ERROR Filter needs Servicing  Replace  Filter NOW     Filter Service Warning    Projector Lamp Life  Error    now   Projector Lamp Life LAMP LIFE WARN Tng Lamp is nearing the end of  Warning it s rated life  Replace soon    The system is unable to  communicate to the Projector     Projector  Communication Error    Projector Te
32.  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Medium  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue          DL 2 User Manual 185    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Chromakey Inverse  Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area  33  Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center  4  Mod3  direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture 5  center  Mod3  subpicture size    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center  6  Mod3 lens size    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center  7  Mod3   lens size    Cartoon Edge  Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38 NA  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity  Color DeConverge ES  3    Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   M
33.  Mod3   Fading  Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection   Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128  makes selected intensity transparent  129 255    Global inverts transparency     Effect 1 Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2    seeds the random number generator  and Mod3  controls raindrop rate     RGB Scale  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and  Mod3 sets overall color range    Mask color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    Edge fade color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    Mask color and Edge fade color  Mod1   red   Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Background Color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    Background Color Cycle  Mod1   red speed   Mod2   green speed  Mod3   blue speed    Reserved  Defaults to effect 0    Collage  Mod1  grid style selection  Mod2 grid  portion displayed  Mod3 edge blend adjustment    Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 135 255    174 DL 2 User Manual          APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Global Effect 1  These Modifier parameters adjust the selected   Modifier 1 Global Effect 1 parameter option from no   Global Effect 1  adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum     Sine adjustment at 255  100      24  25  6    2 Global Effect 1  The type of adjustment depends on the particular  Modifier 3 effect     Off  no effects selection  CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   Reduces color values  Mod1 cyan   Mod2 magenta  Mod3  yell
34.  Note  The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are  recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most  reliable content selection  rendering and output     Opacity    Adjusting an object s opacity allows one object to  show through  another  You can adjust the  opacity of an individual 3  D object from completely transparent to full opacity using this  parameter  Increase opacity from not visible at a value of zero to full opacity at a value of 255     Default DMX Value  0   completely transparent    The Global Intensity parameter provides a similar adjustment to the combined image  This  global control parameter controls intensity levels on the overall image  see Global Intensity on  page 79   When you have multiple objects in relation to each other  the Global Intensity  parameter is the best way to apply a fade to the composite image     Tip  The Dimmer  Object Opacity and Global I ntensity parameters all have to be greater    than O to make a defined image visible        Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX  255  100   Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX  255  100    Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX  255  100   Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX   179  70         DL 2 User Manual 63    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Visual Mode    Visual Mode options are selected using three parameters  The Visual Mode parameter has  options for enhancing and adjusting the black level and contrast of a 3 D object  Once you  choose a visual mode  two M
35.  Protection Against Fire  l  This equipment for connection to branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A     Warning  For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock   l  If this equipment was received without a line cord plug  attach the appropriate line cord  plug according to the following code   e   brown live  e  blue neutral  e  green yellow  earth   2  Asthe colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the  coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug  proceed as follows     e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the  plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol QD  or coloured green or  green and yellow        the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with  the letter N or coloured black        the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked  with the letter L or coloured red     Class   equipment  This equipment must be earthed   4  Equipment suitable for dry locations only  Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture     Refer servicing to qualified personnel  no user serviceable parts inside        DL 2 User Manual 227    APPENDIX E  Safety Information    Appendice        Importantes Informations Sur La S  curit      Mise En Garde  Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les I ncendies    d     Cet appareil de connection au circuit comporte une protection contre le
36.  Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769    54 74  bit adjustment    steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151      Continuous rotation stop     rotation    Continuous rotation stop     49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around X axis  slow to fast  65535  Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around Y axis  fast to slow  Pan     Continuous rotation stop         rotation    Continuous rotation stop         16383  Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y    16384    jc yo  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767  32768  50     horizontal fo     retaionaround Y axis 0   rotation around Y axis     rotation around Y axis 32768   16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769  51 74   adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151  Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around Y axis  slow to fast  65535          DL 2 User Manual 191    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol       Continuous rotation stop     rotation    Continuous rotation stop     16383    Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z  16384  26 49  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767    0   rotation around Z axis 32768   circular 16 bit   Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in 32769     4 74  adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151   Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 4
37.  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Medium  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    Transparent wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area   Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist  center  Mod3  direction and amount of twist  center at 128     Picture in picture  Mod1  x subpicture center   Mod 2   y subpicture center  Mod3  subpicture  size    Magnifying lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y  lens center  Mod3 lens size          DL 2 User Manual    173    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Magnifying lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y 37  lens center  Mod3   lens size  Cartoon Edge    Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast   Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity    Color DeConverge  Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    Horizontal Mirror  Mod1   mirror center  Mod2 and  Mod3 not used    RGB Swap to BGR  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB 43  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero  intensity point in color scheme 
38.  Unique ID   0011112F4B81   E FixtureName   0011112F4B81      IP Address   192 168 1 100     Info Status Tab z E    This screen displays status errors and warnings   a Hoi Statue  oooirg  on items including  A    Filter Life Out Error     Temperature z T     e Filter life By g     Lamp life  gt        USB and Camera Communication z       USB Security 2 iE    Error Warning Messages on page 158        32 DL 2 User Manual    Reset Screen  The Reset screen provides options to reset   Shutdown and upgrade software     Reboot Media Server restarts the fixture   s  internal graphics engine software     Delete User Content removes all user content  on the selected fixture s      Upgrade Factory Content lets you reinstall  factory content in a recovery situation     Note  A copy of the DL 2 Factory Content  can be obtained only from  High End Systems customer service     File  Set  DMX    Test Info    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Reboot Media Server Restart    Delete User Content Delete    Upgrade Factory Content   Upgrade            DL 2 User Manual    33    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System       34    DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 4     DMX Programming Basics    If you are new to DMX programing  this chapter will give you a brief overview  and tips on programming DL 2 fixtures with Wholehog consoles from High End  Systems     DMX Programming Overview    DMX5le Links    A lighting console typically utilizes a protocol called DMX512 to communicate with automated  lighting fixtures 
39.  User  Content Files and Folders on page 133     Type indicates the file format extension    e DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder  This value can be auto assigned  and edited for User content  See Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 133       Size of file in kilobytes  e Date the file was last modified     You can access several options for displaying files in the right pane through the drop down  menu or by right clicking in the right pane when files are being displayed          HighEnd DL  Management Client    File   MEUS Files nu    Refresh               Details       Thumbnails  Small   Thumbnails  Medium   Thumbnails  Large        Ek z All Servers  1  i El B Susan  2    i Br 4  User Content   C User Objects  E    Stock Content       Dai nna na3 O04 nns  m  E Amorphous Digi  SO_Arcticlightmy    SDO_Baitviewe ny    SD  Beerush mv2     SD Bubbles mv2     SD _CloudO0  my            Apollo Glass  2   En 3 Artbeats  3     H E a luna blue  4   d    Beacon  5     Be   noe oe DOE ogg 014 SD  Lavalamp U2 022  be igital Arials 2  7 SD Cloud  l   mw   SD Deep  l mw2    30fps mveme2y  8  5D Rip mv2 mzv  8  SD Rollup mv2 m     be  E HES Gothic  12       of  Digit Airials 1  8    gt  Ee  v U    H E HES Logos  13  023 SD_Slink O24    025     o HES Setup and T 3  fps mvz m2v  11  SD Smeltmv2 m   SD Saftnipple mv2    SD  Spotight mv   SD   RSS NS mzy          n 3 HES Atmospheric     E HES Foliage  11           132 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Manage
40.  User Manual    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Menu Screen Descriptions    Menu screens are presented on the display as a tabs  Sub levels for a specific menu appear as  that tab as is selected     DMX Tab                             gt       5  The DMX screen lets you configure the fixture    8 Source  for the DMX link  view the DMX settings for the    g DMX512 j  fixture on each channel of its range  and view __ E Protocol Start  g          all 512 channel values on the DMX link  i   st dad  gt  j   amp   Standar    sal m Channel  DMX Control Screen E    Use the Control Tab to configure your fixture    Fixture ID  You can choose from three DMX Protocol fiai 1   1    types  E    Standard protocol requires 170 channels      d bl Il DL 2 ters for direct      amp   and enables a parameters for direct     Source TM T   DMX control  WEM 4 i     F       a      e Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint       Art Net  to 132 channels by implementing only two Z  amp  TUN Start      A  graphic objects    Standard      Single protocol simplifies DL 2 control to a g     Channel  single graphic object and uses 94 channels  E Fixture ID  DMX Source defines the source of DMX data    and has two options  ns  e DMX512   Data is transmitted over    standard DMX cables       Art Net   Data is transmitted over Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol  Set the number  of DMX Universes  and DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0  16         Scroll through the numbers 1
41.  along Y axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Y axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Z axis  1 10  Le  a  Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  6 128   50    Actual size along Z axis  1 1     Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Z axis  10 1           204 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 2 Position    Moves object left from center of display 0 36767  Centers object along X axis in display 32768 32768  50    Moves object right from center of display vanes 51 100    Moves object down from center of display 0 36767  32768  50    Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768    Moves object up from center of display escas 5 100 51 100    Moves object nearer from center of display 0  S rem  Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 32768 50    Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769  51 100 100  display 65535          DL 2 User Manual 205    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 3 Function   Standard Protocol     Selects transparency level from completely  Opacity transparent  0  to opaque  255  07259   07109    Graphic 3 Content Definition    No selecion oooO 00  00   Fret Sock3 D Opec atone  a  134   3 D Object File  Additional Stock 3 D Objects 2  2 149  First User 3 D Objects  Additional User Objects 151 255  255    a e    Integrated video camera capture  The Media File 
42.  certain type for a group of fixtures  For example   viewing the CPU Temperature for all the fixtures on a network        DL 2 User Manual 143    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Viewing Fixture Configuration Values   To view configuration information for a individual server  click on All Servers in the left pane  of the CMA window and select the   to view all the servers on the fixture network  Select a  server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane       HighEnd DL  Management Client 3 fex     HIGH END SYSTEMS                 a Ab Servers  4 servers      Serves 1D    IP Adbert    Name   Value      BEE 2 182158 1 108        Ad Met Subnet          3 User Conterd E 122 153 1  108 Art Met Ureveise 0  C User Objects l2 19821681108         Disk Free Space 45546  k k Conbeni E  122 168 1  108 DM Protocol Enhanced  hann   132 168 1 108 Fedure ID  2   m  2 132 168 1 108 Palthoot Urges pe 0    ae own E 182 158 1 108 DM Source DSi    Mg thee  I  2 1321681108 Stat Charnel 000  brian  5    2 182 168 1 108 Data Loss Tirem lis Long  D Al Confgurston  2 132 1651 108 Data Loss Timeout Shutdown Long   2 i32 158 1108 Display Irvert     E 182 155 1  108 Dispis Level On  l2 180 1E8 1 108        Frdure Default  On  le 182 168 1 108 Fidure Hours 150   2 132168 1  108 Fortune Hours Heret 0   2 132168 1 108 Model      Mac OS X  Viewing Server Configuration    To access Server Configuration information for an individual server   select the Configu
43.  component to blue from 0   no color change to  255  10096    blue    Modifier 2  Transitions green color component to red from 0   no color change to  255  10096    red    Modifier 3  Transitions blue color component to green from 0   no color change to  255  10096    green    RGB Swap to GBR M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   7    This option allows you to swap colors  All red values become green  all green values become  blue and all blue values become red     Modifier 1  Transitions red color component to green from 0   no color change to  255  10096    green    Modifier 2  Transitions green color component to blue from 0   no color change to  255  10096    blue    Modifier 3  Transitions blue color component to red from 0   no color change to  255  10096    red    RGB Swap to GRB M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   43    This option allows you to swap colors  All red values become green and all green values become  blue  Blue values are unaffected     Modifier 1  Transitions red color component to green from 0   no color change to  255  100     green    Modifier 2  Transitions green color component to red from 0   no color change to  255  100     blue    Modifier 3  No change to blue color component       102 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    RGB Swap to RBG M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   42    This option allows you to swap colors  All green va
44.  composite image   see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 89      Default DMX Value  32768  50    No Y Rotation      of  Value  Range    1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Y axis  fast to slow   25 Continuous rotation stop  26 49   Rotates the image counterclockwise around Y axis in steps to    720 degrees  50 0   rotation around Y axis  51 74   Rotates the image clockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute  75 Continuous rotation stop  76   100   Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Y axis  slow to fast     Tip  Using this parameter you can turn one object through another       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Y axis rotation applied to Object 2       54 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Z Rotation    The Z Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Z axis  with 16 bit precision  You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a  circular spin at variable speeds     Default DMX Value  32768  50    No Z Rotation      of  Value  Range    4 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Z axis   fast to slow     25 Continuous rotation stop  26 49   Rotates the image counterclockwise around Z axis in steps to    720 degrees  50 0   rotation around Z axis    51 74   Rotates the image clockwise around Z axis in steps to  720 degrees  75 Continuous rotation stop  76   100   Continuous variable speed clockwi
45.  contrast   Sepia tones  Mod1 fades from original color to   145   Visual Mode   sepia colors  Mod2 controls saturation   Red tones  Mod1 fades from original color to red 3  tones  Mod2 controls saturation   Gray maker  Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4  of gray  Mod2 adjusts contrast          DL 2 User Manual 207    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Gray maker2  Always gray  Mod1   brightness   Mod 2   contrast  Posterizer  Mod1 reduces color detail  Mod2  adjusts contrast   Color to Black  amp  White  Mod1 fades color RGB   0 to B W  50  to white  100   Mod2  not  used    145   Visual Mode   Fire Gradient  Mod1fades original to converted  Mod2 not used  reserved   Negative Art  Mod1 fades from original image to  converted image  Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128   subtracts green from 129 255   Exposure Control  Mod1 adjusts color contrast   Mod 2 adjusts color shift  Reserved  defaults to Off 11 255    146   Visual Mode   Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum   0 255   0 100  Modifier 1   147 visual voae Adjusts selected Visual Mode from 0 to maximum  0 255   0 100  Modifier 2       Off  no effects selection   6   9   CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values  1  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values  2  Mod1  cyan  Mod2 magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values  3  Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels  4  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue  RGB 
46.  counterclockwise direction  around the X  Y and or Z axis     Note  Remember that rotation changes could affect an object s  relationship to other objects     When you rotate an object  you are rotating it around the selected axis  X Rotation produces  the effect of a top to bottom flip  Y Rotation produces a left to right flip  Z Rotation causes  a circular motion     X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation  Rotates image Rotates image Rotates image  about the x axis about the y axis about the z axis       DL 2 User Manual 51    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    The Rotation parameters    suggested default values are the midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value  range  which is equal to no rotation  Increasing the DMX value from the midpoint indexes the  object in a clockwise direction  Reducing the DMX value below the midpoint indexes the  object in a counterclockwise direction     When the DMX value for a rotation parameter is greater than the 720   limit in either    direction  the object begins rotating continuously  Additional adjustment to the DMX values  increases the speed of continuous rotation     Counter clockwise Clockwise        Indexed Rotation o Indexed Rotation    720 0 i 0 720       Rotation Speed Rotation Speed       52 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Rotation Parameters    X Rotation    The X Rotation parameter rotates the selected Graphic Object around the x axis with 16 bit  precision  You can ind
47.  edge when Mask Select 0   33 Fad g 127  Strobe rate control from Fastest to slowest 0 255   0 100  aa when Mask Select parameter value   128 255    Global I mage Edge Fade   Image Edge Adjusts the image   s top edge diffusion from hard   0 255   0 100  Fade  Top edge  0  to maximum fade  255   Image Edge Adjusts the image s right edge diffusion from hard 0 255   0 100  Fade  Right edge  0  to maximum fade  255   Image Edge Adjusts the image   s bottom edge diffusion from   0 255   0 100  Fade  Bottom   hard edge  0  to maximum fade  255   Image Edge Adjusts the image s left edge diffusion from hard 0 255   0 100  Fade  Left edge  0  to maximum fade  255     Global Keystone Correction     98 TopletK Move top Ieftcomer xvalue to cerier   0286 0100  0   0   99 TopletY Move top Ieftcomer y value to center   0285 0100  0   0  40  Top Fight X Move top right comer x value to center   0285 0100  0   0  an Top Fight Y Move top right comer y value to center   0285 0100  0 0   42  Bottom Fight X  Move bottom ngh comer x valve to center   0286 0100  0   0   45  Bottom Right Y Move bottom right comer y vaue to center   0286 0100  0 0  aa  Bottom Let X Move bottom left comerx value to center   0286 0100  0   0  45  Bottom Let Y Move bottom left comer y value to center   0285 0100  0   0          180 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Maximum horizontal angle clockwise    Positionx  Center 00   EI  Position x   canter 32768 32768  50  Maximum horizontal angle counterclock
48.  edges of image components to create a cartoon effect     Modifier 1  Adjusts Color reduction from O  no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  adjustment     Modifier 2  Adjusts contrast enhancement from 0 2 no adjustment to 255  10096    maximum  adjustment     Modifier 3  Adjusts edge detection sensitivity from O  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment     Collage Generator C Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode Parameter DMX value   134    The DL2 collage generator enables multiple DL2 units to create virtually seamless panoramic  media projections controlled from a DMX console  You can display either stock or custom  content     The native aspect ratio of one DL 2 fixture s output is 4 3  Some of the arrays configured in  conjunction with the collage generator will output a dif ferent overall aspect ratio  The following  table shows suggested configuration specifications  Array describes the num ber of DL2 units  positioned horizontally by the number of DL 2 fixtures positioned vertically  each displaying their  portion of the content  The second set of numbers is the aspect ratio for the overall panorama  configuration  Image Resolution is represented as width and height in pixels  The number of DL2  units required is also noted     Central Panorama Collage    Array Array  W Aspect Maximum Recommended DL 2  Configuration x H  Ratio Image Resolution  W x H  Units    2x2 4 3 1024 W x 768 H 4                               1024 W x 768 H                        
49.  files and folders between your local drive and a DL 2 fixture server    Move files between networked DL 2 fixtures       222    DL 2 User Manual    Appendix D   DL e Specifications    Fixture mechanical  electrical  optical and component cpecifications are listed     Mechanical   Fixture Dimensions  595mm x 598mm x 911mm  23 4in x 23 6in x 35 9in   Weight  53 5 kg  118 Ibs    Road Case Dimensions  699mm x 724mm x 1080mm  27 5in x 28 5in x 42 5in     Weight  Fixture   Roadcase   107 5kg  237lbs       ooooo  oowW    DOG  ep         20 4 in       DL 2 User Manual 223    APPENDIX D  DL 2 Specifications    Electrical Specifications    WARNING   AN Class 1 equipment   This equipment must be earthed     I nput ratings  100 120V 7 0A maximum 50 60Hz  200 240V 3 5A 50 60Hz  Power factor  0 94   Fuse  Power supply output fuse  5A  250V slow blow only    Lamp  300W NSH   Light Output  5000 ANSI lumens    Rated Lamp Life  1500 hours    Projector Specifications    Aspect ratio  4 3 native   Brightness uniformity  90    Contrast ratio  1200  1  full on full off   Display technology  1 3  LCD w MLA  3 panels  Panel resolution  1024 x 768 dots    Zoom Lens Throw Ratio  1 8   2 4 1    Camera Module Specification    Construction  Super HAD CCD sensor technology  Lens  18x Optical Zoom   Horizontal view angle  48   2 8    Auto focus Range  29mm   800mm   Picture Elements  380K pixels  768  H  x 582  V      Minimum working distance  29mm  WIDE end  800mm  TELE end        nvironmental Specificat
50.  nonblack pels Rea Omm   Be  7 ROBswbGER  Reato Green  Green to Blue Blue to Red       8  RGBswaptoBRG   RGB swaptoBRG OOOO to BRG Blue to Green to Green    EN    1 If color value    DMX value  invert  color Green Blue    E a mer  am   me    S Solaria a olor value  DMK setcoorio0  Red   Green   Be   LI    MENNNE NE NEN   EE All or Nothing If color value    mod value como  color   255  else color   0    74 DL 2 User Manual          CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects      Name Definition Modifier    Modifier 2   Modifier 3  Red to Green to Blue to  20 Edge Detect Color Horizontal Vertical Comparison  search size   search size threshold  24 Edge Detect B W Horizontal Vertical Comparison  search size   search size threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal Amplitude Phase  Texture Ripple  Vertical Amplitude  1    f     Phase and  24 Tenue Ripple  Circular Amplitude Direction    25 Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular Amplitude Phase  0 Chromakey Medium  Inverse   Red   Green   Blue  Chromakey Coarse  Inverse   Red   Green   Blue  3  5  6  7    fades to  converted Not Used  image    Scan line converts image colors to colors in a   selects scan  single line of the image    behind it OPNIPE options    Transparent Wipes    opens    the selected Selects from      e       Selects center i  graphic to reveal another graphic positioned   Area of wipe 6 wipe  direction and  Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture X  twist center y twist center  amount of  twist  Picture in 
51.  of a media file segment as 0  o  o  62 a percentage of the movie length m  63 Defines the end of a Media File segment as a  Sout Frame percentage of the movie length rae eae a    Play forward looping continuously   oO   0    Play forward once and hold on the last frame a 3  Puss   Play forward if opacity  gt  0  hold on last frame  3    Pause andrewindtoInFrame     and rewind to In Frame                                  ane    Play forward if opacity  gt  0  looping continuously    65   Play Mode Scrub  Display  the selected In Frame cee ree         7   Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame E    Scrub  Display  the selected In Frame with  statistics    Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame with  statistics    182 DL 2 User Manual       APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 1 49      p 1 127   149     Graphic 1 Synchronization  No selection O   0 00   Sypiybok  metooedi   1  Sywetobei2 00000 ao  Swetojed3 O  08      Syetrmblni oo   4  Syetrmwlon2 o s  Synctoroiaions o  06    Sync to negative raton 1   7  Sync to negative rotations J 9       No Selection    Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 NN    ane to Fixture ID Number 2    Sync to Fixture Number 254    Sync to Fixture ID Number 255   255    Graphic 1 Effects    Off  No visual mode processing applied to output  0      Content Optimization 1  Mod1  black level  Mod2 7 contrast   Sepia tones  Mod1 fades from original color to   Visual Mode   sepia colors  Mod2 controls saturation   Red tones
52.  the logic board to ensure good electrical  contact     rm  E  EN    not force  the gasket over the lamp cover located on the back of  the projector          Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface  Select Calibrate    Motors through the Test Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10  minutes while calibration occures     Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board  To replace motor driver board located in the fixture base housing     l     Disconnect power to the fixture  If the fixture has been operating  allow the fixture to cool  before handling       Loosen the two phillips head screws on menu display panel side of the Box cover      Loosen screws on menu display panel and gently open away from the fixture leaving the    harness cabling attached       The driver board for pan functions and fans is located directly behind the display     5  After detaching all cabling  pull board out and replace     CAUTI ON   The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws    are missing from driver boards       Reattach cables       Replace the side panel and top cover  Make sure you align the assembly properly when    inserting  damage to the fixture can result from improper alignment       Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface  Select Calibrate Motors through the    Test Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration  occures        156    DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Troubleshoo
53.  to    the projector RGBHV input option  S Video Camera to the projector    Output to another  DL 2 fixture or device   gt _video In to    the graphics engine    CAUTION   To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty  do not    physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time     Configuring the Video Input Source    DL 2 fixtures support multiple SVideo formats including     NTSC_M SECAM_B  SECAM K   NTSC MJ SECAM D   SECAM K1  SECAM G      SECAM L         PALN     SECAMH   SECAM L1    You will need to configure the DL 2 fixture to identify which video input source you have chosen   The active input can be configured the following ways          Manually using the DL 2 menu system  see information about the Projector Input field on  the Set Projector Screen on page 29      e Remotely through the CMA  see Editing Configuration Values on page 144     Via the DMX console commands  see Projector Control on page 121      NOTE  The integrated cameras provides an NTSC M video signal        124 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 13  Live Video Input and Control    Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out    The factory default assigns the video feed from the internal camera to the graphics engine   However  the DL2 fixture can be configured to route the camera video feed to the Camera Out  connector by setting the Control Parameter to a DMX value between 229 232     NOTE  The internal camera video feed can be routed to either the graphic  engine or the camera out conne
54.  to move   e What existing server content you want to preserve     Whether the client machine is currently connected to the ethernet fixture link      f you want to maintain currently assigned content identification DMX values   e Which CMA version you are using  Windows or Mac OS   There are several methods for moving User content files and media folders between DL 2  fixtures to your local drive    e Drag and Drop     Copy and Paste commands      Cloning transfers the User Content files and their DMX value assignments from one DL 2  server to other server s  on the fixture network       Creating a Content Archive      Deploying a Content Archive    Use the following table to determine the best method for your situation     Transfer Type    Fixture Network From Server From Client Between  File Transfer Method to Client Machine to Networked  Machine Server s  DL 2 Server s     Yes  if format  Drag and Drop hi vel tor  destination Does NOT preserve DMX  folder Values    E        A and Paste  ean n       qoe  J     Yes X PPreserves DMX values    D mm ST Replaces any  ep ees Content previous User Content  Archive on destination drive    Saves assigned DMX  Creating a Content values when creating  Archive archive from content on  a fixture          DL 2 User Manual 135    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Downloading Content from a DL e Fixture to Your Local Drive  The CMA supports downloading User content files or folders from a DL 2 fixture to your local  driv
55.  vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Vertical   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Medium  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue          DL 2 User Manual 209    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Chromakey Inverse  Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area  33  Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center  4  Mod3  direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture 5  center  Mod3  subpicture size    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center  6  Mod3 lens size    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center  7  Mod3   lens size    Ca
56. 0  Masking  Control oie seine atwiinianewaawen du dud aA EE NUR NIRE KANN NE E ER INR 83  Mask Shape Select and Strobing         ssssssssssrersrersrrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrresrresrne 83  Mask STV SS ape ti Goleta Cr 83  Strobibldg   Mask SHAPES  zprac rer E tien Pit qan et semua e EENETI 83  MOSKE me M PEE TER 84  MaskcEdge Ede sesscerksutedeta tete E es ocho eats unde sduR ualet ate uat iR 85  Image Edge Fade Szaassexsaoqpcncemes did vota dun Dedi bee ean Ret PUNIRI NR P AG wena c IM 86  Keystone Correction Parameters                         eeeeessesne nena nna nn nnne a nana nnn 87  X Rati 25  5 5250508  5590000 0B s o EE RE RSEREDPEVE ER REsDRRRRREEU CENE RERUNESE UNE DIE UM PRESEESRNS ERE EE 88  be iR E 88  Global Viewpoint Mode issus sss EE RT REEREEREEFEEREERERRREERRVERERTERKEIRRRRRRERARRRRRA RR PARES 89  Perspective View  Spherical Coordinates                     sss nnns 89  Perspective View  Cartesian Coordinates                 ssssssssssssse nee 89  Orthogonal View  Cartesian Coordinates                  ssssssssssssse eem nnns 89  Viewpoint  Position X i    esos rLronsm Ee rEnns E a ia naban Naaa anhaa ANANA 90       DL 2 User Manual    xiii    Viewpoint POSITION Y        5 vss unu suvuv  nua nunusuuSEEREKEEEERRERSRARGRRRARAR  RRERRERERRRRRERERRRRREEE 90  Viewpoint Position Z  ZOOM     eiescionnnnrneinrs   vin dci ii OR E UC GG e OGRACO RO E OR RWROD 90    Chapter 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions  Effects can be applied to the Media File content  textur
57. 1  At a DMX value of 0  the image will be full color  As you increase the DMX value   more gray is introduced until  at a DMX value of 255  all color has been replaced with shades  of gray     Modifier 2  Adjusts the brightness of the image at the grayscale transition level selected  with the Modifier 1 parameter           i N  maii  Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4 Visual Mode Modifier1 DMX value 128  50      Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4  Visual Mode Modifier1 DMX value 190 75    Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100         68 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Gray maker 2  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   5    This option converts a color image to grayscale and then lets you adjust black level and  contrast     NOTE  If content is already grayscale  there is no effect applied but  Modifier 2 can still affect image contrast     Modifier 1  Adjusts the black level of the grayscale image from a DMX value of 0   Full  brightness to 255   completely black    Modifier 2  Adjusts contrast of the grayscale image from 0   no adjustment to  255  100     maximum contrast        W o       Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4          Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4  Visual Mode Modifier DMX value  90  33 3      Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 175 77         DL 2 User Manual 69    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects   Posterizer   Visual Mode Param
58. 17    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions       118 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter Ie   Fixture Motion Functions    This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it   s  internal projector     Pan and Tilt    The DL 2 fixture has a 400   pan range and a 240   tilt range  Two DMX channels for Pan and  two for Tilt provide 16 bit position adjustment to a fraction of a degree     MSpeed values can control the timing of pan and tilt motion for DL 2 fixtures   see MSpeed   Motor Speed  on page 120   To control Pan and Tilt movement timing via a DMX controller  crossfading  leave the Pan Tilt MSpeed in it   s default Off setting     Note  The DL 2 fixture uses optical encoders for pan and tilt to instantly  correct the fixture   s position if the fixture is jarred from its  programmed position     If a physical obstruction prevents the fixture from correcting its position   this correction feature  times out  to prevent wear on the motors     If the fixture s position correction has timed out  remove the  obstruction and home the fixture to return it to normal operation     Dimmer    The DL 2 fixture has a mechanical iris located in front of the projector output lens that  functions as a dimmer for the fixture s output  This feature gives the operator the ability to  fully shutter the output and eliminate the residual luminance from video black  The Dimmer  parameter controls the dimming iris adjustment from closed  DMX value   0  to fully open   DMX val
59. 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Control Projector Floor Orientation 205 208 208    10   Function       continued  Projector Ceiling Orientatio Active on 212    Projector Front Projection Commands EIE 213 216 216    Projector Rear Projection EE T  217 220    External RGBHV to Projector LAA na  Graphics Engine to Projector  default  N NA    Internal Camera to Graphics Engine  default  233 236 236    Internal Camera Functions    11   Camera   0    Zoom position 65535 0 100   32768  50  13 Focus position    0 511   511 LM  j4   Camera Focus  Manual Focus from In  Far End  to Out  Near EUN 0 100   End  65535    Camera s IR sensing off  illuminator off CHE    S Video In to Graphic Engine  Internal Camera to 229 232  Camera Out    Infrared  Camera s IR sensing on  illuminator off     s IR  Camera s IR sensing on  illuminator off     on  illuminator off 64 127   25 49    Illuminator Camera   s IR sensing on  illuminator scaled e  across the range from FULL to OFF          170 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Auto Exposure   Full Auto 0 25    Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority   Shutter Speed   30 64 95   26 38  Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority   Shutter Speed  15 96 126   39 49    Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority        Camera Shutter Speed   8 127 157 50 62  Shutter    Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority   Shutter Speed   4 158 188  63 74    Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority   Shutter Speed   2 189 219  75 86    Auto Exposure   Shutter Priority   Shut
60. 209 560  US 5 278 742   US 5 282 121  US5 307 295  US 5 329 431  US 5 331 822  US 5 367 444  US 5 402 326 US 5 430 629   US 5 432 691  US 5 454 477  US 5 455 748  US 5 506 762  US 5 515 254  US 5 537 303  US5 545 951   US 5 580 164  US 5 590 954  US 5 590 955  US 5 640 061  US 5 647 662  US5 665 305  US 5 691 886   US 5 728 994  US 5 758 955  US 5 758 956  US 5 769 527  US5 774 273  US 5 798 619  US 5 806 951   US 5 823 661  US 5 825 548  US5 828 485  US 5 829 868  US 5 857 768  US 5 882 107  US 5 934 794   US 5 940 204  US 5 945 786  US5 953 152  US 5 980 066  US 6 048 080  US 6 327 103  US 6 048 081   US 6 057 958  US6 054 816  US 6 126 288  US 6 142 652  US 6 172 822  US 6 188 933 US 6 208 087   US 6 219 093  US 6 220 730  US 6 241 366  US 6 255 787  US 6 256 136  US 6 278 542  US6 288 828   US 6 327 103  US 6 421 165  US 6 430 934  US 6 466 357  US 6 502 961  USD347 113  US D350 408   US D359 574  US D360 404  US D365 165  US D366 712  US D370 080  US D372 550  US D377 338    US D381 740  US D409 771  US 6693392  US 6719433  EP 0662275  EP 0767398  DE 621495  DE 655144   DE 797503  EP 0475082  GB 2 043 769 B  GB 2 055 842 B  GB 2 283 808 B  GB 2 290 134 B  GB 2 291814 B   GB 2 292 530 B  GB 2 292 896 B  GB 2 294 909 B  GB 2 295 058 B  GB 2 303 203 B  GB 2 306 887 B    GB 2 307 036 B  GB 2 316 477 B  MR0862 1996  M9 604 224 9        vi DL 2 User Manual    What You Should Know About Copyright    The following FAQ can help you understand copyright laws and how they apply to 
61. 255  parameter is ignored    No selection   136   Media File First Media File  Additional Media Files 2 255 mE   2 255   mRame     Deme the beginning of a Media File segment as m 100  o  nFrame   percentage of the movie length ae   E Defines the end of a Media File segment as a 0 100 165535  percentage of the movie ent Beas    Play forward looping continuously       0 o     Play forward once and hold on the lastframe   1  Puss     Play forward if opacity  gt  0  hold on lastirame   3  nee EORNM      Pause and rewind to In Frame     and rewind to In Frame  141   Play Mode Pause ana rownd ion Fame ME  Display  the selected In Frame   Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame    Scrub  Display  the selected In Frame with  statistics    Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame with  statistics    206 DL 2 User Manual          APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 1 49  fag leased p 1 127   149     Graphic 3 Synchronization  No selecton 00   0  00      Sync playback time to object1   1  Synctoobject2     0000000 a2  Synctoobject3 O 03  Synctorotationt o   4  Synctorotation2     0 8  Syctorotaton 3  Sync to negative rotation 0  oT  Syneto negative ioni       9       No Selection    Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 NN    144   Sync To OE to Fixture ID Number 2    Sync to Fixture Number 254    Sync to Fixture ID Number 255   255    Graphic 3 Effects    Off  No visual mode processing applied to output  O    Content Optimization 1  Mod1  black level  Mod27
62. 48  Playpack MOE srs a a T T a estan edes 48  Playback Spee UP MN  IE 49    Chapter 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale  You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and  speed  along with it s position and scale in x  y  and z axis directions     Rotating a 3 D Object            s oissvauussuuaukosVuSERRRRRERREEERSRRESRZENARRAERERRRERRREREREERRR N  S 51  Rotation Parameters  ice susp Van R RReREEEEC EE EEERYS UD I OUO T REY EERE E PERENRRE EE ENER ER RECEN RN RATES 53  PI ROCAUIOM estas unde etus Bona p A HU da Piquet eid ti mad Saa x POMOP pd hah no tps cd 53  ROION s quu inia diras ama A ANE ED Dae UM WURDE E E Ge a iR OM 54  ZROUSEIODE sezevitiissaeitadeateni loeis AEAEE sa son oA Or arit a ci Ra oan ERA RAD 55  Scaling the ODI CCE ortu ur onusEuuh a ented ededeiatedeeedateterenenteagecucses 56  pere  LEEREN IMMUNE 56   c ASETE TET A A TEA SEE FE E EE TE ENE A ETTE 57  Z OCE ee E E E dee ain Medd S A NEON 58  Changing Object Position          ssssssssssn222222222u220uu220uu200uunnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 59  K POSION arrine A E E r rede eT V RV ad 59  3 OSILEFO orrae E aa ci a E a TA 60  ZOPOSIEIOTI oraa o E A E E AE A N 61    Chapter 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects  You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric  effects to each individual Graphic Object     Opacity E E EA E A E 63  Visual  MOde   2 55  osusssuv tse E IEaMERECEDEEEPEEPEAR  RRSEREERARE RAP PRRMERRS RSEN III GIN RV I ID SP UTC EE
63. 5  153   60   99   4268  152   60   98    4434  150   59   96    1979  185   73   BO   478   221   87   DD   506   220   86   DC   534   219   86   DB    2151   182   71   B6    0 94  227  2 46  286          DL 2 User Manual 219    APPENDIX B  MSpeed Conversion Table     4954   144   56 90   5224   141   55 8D   5596v  187   54   89   5884   134   53   86  64 80 50  49  48  4T   T7  45   74  6C  8795  107   42 6B  6A  40   67   4   4 65    w   9598 102   40   95 21 100   40    9645 100   39   64   9770 99   30   63   9895  98   38   62     3  2  2  1  0  0  0  39     0149 96   38   60  93   10928  90   35   5A   110 61  89   35   59    463  86   34   56   77  72   28   48  44032  68   27   44   50   20   32       18    173 57 4f   18   2  2  16   2A  185 44  40  195 92 34 13 22  203 08 30 12 1E  208 52  24 18  21590  28   9   17   217 76  22   9   16  21  22151  20   8   4  12  229 11  16   6   10  231 03  15   6   OF  23490  13   5 0D  29879 M   4    2472  9   4   09   8   3 085          248 68  6   2   06  248 68  6   2 06    04          220    DL 2 User Manual    Appendix C     Custom User Content    There are several considerations to keep in mind when creating custom content to  control with the DL 2 graphics engine software     Read the following specifications and recommendations before creating custom content  If a file  is not DL2 compatible  it may load but not appear as output  The CMA thumbnail view of content  will note incompatible files with an X     Creating V
64. 5 for 16 bit   Consult  your lighting console manual for further information        36 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 4  DMX Programming Basics    I6 bit DMX    Individual access of the two DMX channels used with 16 bit parameters varies by lighting  console  Most modern DMX consoles bind these two channels into a single 16 bit parameter to  accurately perform 16 bit crossfades  Consult your lighting console manual for further  information     Wholehog Ill Programming Notes    Play Speed    You can adjust the Play Speed using the encoder wheel on the Beam parameter of the Graphic  fixture type  Additionally you can press    enable    and select    Media Speed Default On    to revert  to the default speed setting  DMX 128   Then if you touch the encoder again the previous play  speed will be recalled     Mask Strobe    A unique function of the Wholehog 3 library system allows the creation of a special encoder  type  Flying Pig Systems has created a parameter called    mask strobe    in the Global fixture  type  When this is adjusted  it will automatically change the DMX value of the mask select  channel to the appropriate value and adjust the DMX channel for the strobe speed  This will  override the Mask Edge parameter as per the DL2 DMX Protocol     Play Modes  Opacity     Using the Graphic fixture type  press the Mode button to view the play mode options  By default  all modes trigger normally  If available per the DL2 DMX protocol  you can select    Media Trigger  Opacity    t
65. 8  5096    no  adjustment  Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0   maximum image  magnification  Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255  10096       maximum     Modifier 2  Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis  A value of 128  5096    no  adjustment  Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0   maximum image magnifica   tion  Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255  10096  2 maxi   mum     Modifier 3  Not Used  NOTE  The Tiling effect implemented on Effect 1 overrides tiling on Effect 2        116 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Transparent Wipes M Object Effect      v  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   33    Transparent wipes let you open one graphic to reveal another graphic behind it  You can select  from six options and the centerline of the effect     Rectangle wipes from center out horizontally  43 84   Rectangle wipes from edges out horizontally    85 126   Wipes from center out vertically    127 170   Wipes from edges out vertically  171 212   Cross shape wipes from center out  212 255   Box shape wipes from edges outward    Modifier 1  Adjusts the area of the wipe from the smallest at a value of O to the largest at a  value of 255  100          Modifier 2  Selects the center of a wipe effect s separation    Modifier 3  Selects the wipe option  Each option occupies a portion of the DMX value range        DL 2 User Manual 1
66. 8 Standard  Fixture ID          1    Rst  Test  Info    DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16      Choose from three DMX Protocol types     jen     Start  Channel                   e Standard protocol requires 170 channels and enables all DL 2 parameters for direct DMX    control       Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint to 132 channels by implementing only two    graphic objects       Single protocol simplifies DL 2 control to a single graphic object and uses 94 channels     Select a valid Start Channel in the Start Channel field by using the up and down arrows on the  multidirectional button to step through the numbers 1 512  For more information on choosing  valid DL 2 DMX Start Channels  see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 35       Standard protocol valid start channel   1 343       Dual protocol valid start channel   1 381       Single protocol valid start channels   1 419        DL 2 User Manual    15    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Setup Configuration Using the CMA   The Content Management Application running on your computer and linked to DL 2 fixtures via  Ethernet lets you remotely configure the DL 2 fixtures  For more information on the CMA  see  Chapter 14  Content Management Application  CMA  on page 127  To view configuration  information for a individual server  click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and  select the   to view all the servers on the fixture network  Select a server in the left pane 
67. 9      Chapter 13  Live Video Input and Control on  page 123     DMX Protocol  The Global tab display the current values for      Global Screen    parameters that affect the composite image     For more information on specific Global  parameters  see Chapter 10  Global Functions  on page 79     DMX Protocol _Obj Screens   Obj 1  Obj 2  and Obj 3 tabs display  parameters values affecting a single object s  content  For more information on specific  Graphic Function parameters  see       Chapter 6  Graphic Functions  Defining  Content on page 43       Chapter 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation   Position  Scale on page 51       Chapter 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and  Effects on page 65  and    X3   ap em  a2 tion Camera  2s   Pan 41409 Zoom 32767  ie      Tilt   0 Focus 33023  PLU ss c   n Focus 127 Shutter 0     B Zoom   127 White Bal o     MSpeed 0 Orient       3 Macro     0 Effects 0    Control O RedGain O  E Blue Gain     0      Sc          E   Intensity 255    8    Fx1Mode   11  02  03  0    8 3  Fx2Mode   oal   02    o3 0  ie    3 Mask Sel 0 Size 255  255 Fade 0  Eig Edge Fade T OR oB   oL 0    4 KeyTopX OY    OX   oY o 0    KeyBttnmX OY OX OY 0    Key RatioX 128 Y 128  o liew Mode   0    View Pos X 32768 Y 32768 Z 30260    O Cntrl Val   0    Cntrl Mode    Rst Test Info       5 E Opacity 255 Object  7    9   Media Dir 7 Media File  7  3  E InFrame O Out Frame 65535  zi  lt  PlayMode     PlaySpeed 192  i  8 Sync Type O SyncTo O  2 WisMode 11 02 0  E 5 FxiMode 31 02 03 0    
68. 9154  76 100  rotation around Z axis  slow to fast  65535    Graphic 1 Scaling    Minimum object size along X axis  1 10    oO   0   Increases object size along X axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  128   50    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0  0 24  object rotation around Z axis  fast to slow  16382  32768  50    Actual size along X axis  1 1     Increases object size along X axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along X axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Y axis  1 10  o o   Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 1 127 1 49  to actual size  87   Scale Y 128   50    Actual size along Y axis  1 1     Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Y axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Z axis  1 10  Le  a  Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  8 128   50    Actual size along Z axis  1 1     Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Z axis  10 1           192 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 1 Position    Moves object left from center of display 0 36767  Centers object along X axis in display 32768 32768  50    Moves object right from center of display vanes 51 100    Moves object down from center of display 0 36767  32768  50    Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768    Moves object up from cent
69. Add 2 All Pixels  5   148 Aud Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   mer RGB Add  non black pixels  s   Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue  RGB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   RGB Swap to BGR  Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color   Mod   red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   Solarize 2  if color value    DMX  invert color  10  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   Solarize  if color value    DMX  set color to 0  44  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     208 DL 2 User Manual       APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling   Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    All or Nothing  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    Solid Color RGB   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    RGB Invert   Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR   Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG   Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green  Edge Detect Color   Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold   Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   
70. All Servers view   see Verifying Software Versions on page 141      To upgrade the fixture software  first download the file from the website to your computer  Then  use the CMA to upload it to your DL 2 fixtures   see Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software on page  142      Installing and Launching the Content Management Application  CMA     The Content Management Application software that shipped on CD with your fixture  communicates with DL2 fixtures over an Ethernet network to      Upload and download custom digital content to fixtures     Remotely control all menu commands      Update software  The following are recommended hardware requirements for the CMA        Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 or later  e Microsoft  Net Framework 1 1 with Service Pack 1 installed      100 1000 base Ethernet card  a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content  uploading of large files   After setting up your Ethernet network and linking all DL 2 fixtures and your computer  Insert  the CD that shipped with your fixture to automatically install the CMA on your harddrive  For  more information on CMA operation  see Chapter 14  Content Management Application  CMA   on page 127     Note  If the CMA doesn t automatically launch  navigate to the dl2client msi  file in your windows browser and double click to launch     You can download the latest version of the CMA from the High End Systems website at  www highend com  support  A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal  computer 
71. DL e Digital Light  User Manual          High End Systems  Inc  2005  All Rights Reserved    Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice  High End Systems  Inc   assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual     Trademarks used in this text  High End Systems  WholeHog III  Catalyst  the Catalyst Logo  and LithoPatterns  are registered trademarks  and Hog iPC  the High End Systems globe logo and the Hog logo are trademarks of  High End Systems  Inc  or High End Systems Europe Ltd  Belden is a registered trademark of Belden  Inc   Microsoft  DirectX  and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  the United States and or other countries  Super HAD and Sony are registered trademarks or trademarks of  Sony Corporation in the United States and or other countries  Art Net is a registered trademark of Artistic  License Corporation  Lightwave 3 D is a registered trademark of Newtek  Mac OS is a trademark of Apple  Computer  Inc  registered in the U S  and in other countries     Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the  marks and names or their products  High End Systems disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and  trade names owned by others     HIGH END SYSTEMS   gt          DL 2 User Manual  P N 60600245  June  2006    Contacting High    nd Sustems     Sales Department    C
72. EE EUER 64       xii DL 2 User Manual    GONtEHIL OPEIMIZALION  ROME E DN 65    Push to SEDIT oiseau n AED de OX NU cac e Occo E  U LE Ro ar add fate 66  PUSA COREG  saris E 67  Gray ASIN NH  68  GY  Mok 25d eodd aine on tases edam on a a ea C CUM ESAME Nd 69  POSTERIZEN   sisti es r a A vira daret tv e abb d 2 do tere Du ur rib bd m ddl IR 70   COGIT EO B WN aese oa as poem tustustile abo oso umo tNcR onan o Fass 71  IFS Gia OLS cu ccm 71  ISCAS waster Ecc 72  EXDOSUPE  COntrol RN PR rr 73  Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode                               eeeeee een n nnnm nnn 74    Chapter 9  Graphic Functions  Synchronizing Content  After designating a master fixture with the Sync To parameter  you can  synchronize the content of other fixtures to any Object on the master in terms  of playback time  rotation or both     Synchronization Parameters                      seeeeessusneee ea aaannnn eu uauua nnn uana uan 77  SV NG MOG cc 77  PAY GNC Nono MEET Tm 78  req p D                                  T 78    Chapter 10  Global Functions  Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or  three separate object graphics  You can adjust intensity  define masks  select  a point in space to view the composite image  and control keystone correction     Global Intensity vssisasninsesccstwcucedenswewerdwtvinsededeaniasdacasesacasaeusqdanadanavaucucescanvsauerss 79  Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2                               eeeeee seen nennen nnne 8
73. EMS       Em All Servers  1 server     Ea Susan  2      000 Amorphous Long Trailer mv2 m    m2v 1 38 929 KB 10 5 2004 3 01 04 PM  Er H  User Content  Z  001 Blue 70s mv2 m2v m2 2 13033KB 10 5 2004 3 00 34 PM   s r  User Objects  7  002 Bright Psych  mv2 m2v mv 3 29316KB 10 5 2004 3 00 22 PM   B     des EE wey      E  003 Max Psych mv2 m2v mv 4  amp OGDKB 10 5 2004 3 00 00 PM         O04 Ripple Melt 3 mv2 m2v m2wv 5 B amp 14EKB 10 5 2004 2 59 54 PM    1 ANF Z m iara Himna mer mh rada E 163790 he 106  3nna Ao 407 Bhd       3D Object Files    Object files are the 3 D object component files used to build a graphic image  DL 2 protocol  Supports a combined total of 255 object files displayed in Stock Objects and User Objects  folders  As with Stock Media files  the Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be  edited  A User created object file must be assigned a unique DMX value between 150 255     Viewing Server Configuration Data   Selecting an individual server from the list in the left pane displays all the configuration values  for that server in the right pane  Selecting All Configuration displays the combined  configuration values for all the servers on the network  For more information on fixture  configuration  see Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration on page 143     _  Mac OS X  Viewing Server Configuration       To access Server Configuration information for an individual server   select the Configuration option under the individual server     Vieuiing Conte
74. Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   74    Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it  You  can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it  This  parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without an associated texture     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component speed  A DMX value of 128  50     default cycle  speed  DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255   10096    fastest change speed  DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a  backward direction to 0   fastest change speed     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1     Intensity Key M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   45    This option turns pixels of a selected intensity transparent or applies the reverse effect     Modifier 1  Selects intensity from a DMX value of 0   no intensity to 255  10096    full  intensity     Modifier 2  Selects intensity bandwidth from a DMX value of 0   narrowest bandwidth to 255    widest bandwidth     Modifier 3  Turns selected intensity range transparent from 0   no change to 128   fully  transparent  DMX values above the midpoint of the range change all intensities outside of the  selected range transparent from 129   no transparency to 255   full reverse transparency     Ma
75. From command  cmd  c diskpart  s DL2EWFPart txt    Return to Main Menu  X          DL 2 User Manual 167    CHAPTER 16  Restoring the System       168 DL 2 User Manual    Appendix A   DL 2 DMX Protocol    This table describes the Standard  Dual and Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures     Motion and Camera Control   Standard  Dual  Single Protocol        Movement Functions         0  2 PanFie Moves projector head from 0   to 400 65535 0 100   32768  Tilt Course     0   Tilt Fine Moves projector head from 0   to 240 65535 0 100   32768  5 Adjusts the mechanical iris located in front of the 0 255   0 100  projector output lens from closed to open    6  Focus   Adjusts focus from near to far 0 255   0 100     7  Zoom   Adjusts zoom from narrow to wide 0 255   0 100    8  MSpeed   See Appendix B for conversion tables   0 255  0 100  0  0   2  Macro   Reserved for futureuse   0255  0 00  0  0     se ooo   08   NA   Pan and Tilt MSpeed off 10 13  14 19  ent triggering  some  Menu Display Dim  5    30 38  econ  Menu Display Bright  5  activate until the 40 48  value has been held  59  NA   20      80      80        169       10  Function fora period of time    50 58   59  Home All A number in 60 68   parenthesis is the   69 79  EGInD C minimum number   90 88  MEE  Lamp OFF of consecutive times 5  95  a DMX value must   99 119  Shutdown  80 be received froma  120 130  controller before   131 144  Graphics System Reset  80  the operation starts 145 149  Camera Reset   150 155          DL 
76. G  Mod1   red to  inverted blue  Mod2 7 green to inverted red   Mod3   blue to inverted green    Edge Detect Color   Mod1  horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3  comparison threshold    Edge Detect B W   Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Global Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  Effect 2 Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2 72 green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Medium  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    Transparent wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area   Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist  center  Mod3   direction and amount of twist  center at 128           176 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Picture in picture  Mod1  x subpicture center   Mod2   y subpicture center  Mod3  subpicture  size   Magnifying lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y  lens center  Mod3 lens size    Ma
77. GB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   RGB Swap to BGR  Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color   Mod   red  Mod2 2 green  Mod3   blue   Solarize 2  if color value    DMX  invert color  10  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   Solarize  if color value    DMX  set color to 0  44  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     184 DL 2 User Manual       APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling   Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    All or Nothing  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    Solid Color RGB   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    RGB Invert   Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR   Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red  RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG   Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green  Edge Detect Color   Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold   Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Vertical  
78. L 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    I Sob nes Stare enanner    1  Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane S UIGH END SYSTEMS  and double click on the line with Start Channel in the  Name column to bring up the edit dialog box             Enter a new configuration value    2  Enter a valid Start Channel for the protocol type you Bi o    have chosen    Standard protocol   1 343  Dual Protocol   1 381  Single Protocol   1 419    Shutting Down the Fixture    Recommended Shutdown Options    There are two recommended ways to shutdown the fixture     1  A DMX controller can shut down the fixture   s motion controls and projector remotely with  the shutdown option of the control channel  see Fixture Operations on page 120      2  The DL 2 fixture automatically shuts down in the event of DMX data loss  The default time is  10 min  To edit the length of time the fixture waits for a DMX input before shutting down   use the CMA  see Editing Configuration Values on page 144   or the fixture   s menu system    see Set Fixture Screen on page 28      WARNING    Removing power directly without the shutdown sequence built  into the two recommended procedures can severely reduce  fixture reliability     Placing Fixture in Road Case    Before shipping the DL 2 fixture  lock its pan and tilt  position so the fixture does not move during transit    zrg    H i eee MAAR ARAAF  To lock the fixture  P2        l  Orient the projector head pan position as  shown for pac
79. MX value   47    Reduce and increase color components in the image as a part of the overall color range   Note  the maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range     Modifier 1  Scales Red in the Media file  A DMX Value of 128   no adjustment  DMX values  below 128  5096  reduce color value  DMX values over 128 increase color value     Modifier 2  Scales Green in the Media file  A DMX Value of 128   no adjustment  DMX values  below 128  5096  reduce color value  DMX values over 128 increase color value     Modifier 3  Scales Blue in the Media file  A DMX Value of 128   no adjustment  DMX values  below 128  5096  reduce color value  DMX values over 128 increase color value     RGB Swap to BGR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   41    This option allows you to swap colors  All red values become green and all blue values become  red  Green values are unaffacted     Modifier 1  Transitions red color component to blue from 0   no color change to  255  100     green    Modifier 2  No change to green color component    Modifier 3  Transitions blue color component to green from 0   no color change to  255  10096    red       DL 2 User Manual 101    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    RGB Swap to BRG M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   8    This option allows you to swap colors  All red values become blue  all green values become red  and all blue values become green     Modifier 1  Transitions red color
80. Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127   1 49  o  1 127   1 49    Graphic 2 Synchronization  Noselecton 0 00 o  Sync playback ime to objett   1  Synctoobjet2 OOo 0  2  Synctoobjet3 O e  Syneto rotation O a  Synctorotaton2 O 8  Synctorta  ons O e  Sync to negative rotaton 1 O L 7  Sync to negative rotaton3   o       No Selection    Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 NN    106   Sync To OE to Fixture ID Number 2    Sync to Fixture Number 254    Sync to Fixture ID Number 255   255     Graphic 2 Effects    Off  No visual mode processing applied to output  0  Content Optimization 1  Mod1  black level  Mod27 contrast   Sepia tones  Mod1 fades from original color to   107   Visual Mode   sepia colors  Mod2 controls saturation   Red tones  Mod1 fades from original color to red 3  tones  Mod2 controls saturation   Gray maker  Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4  of gray  Mod2 adjusts contrast          DL 2 User Manual 195    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Gray maker2  Always gray  Mod1   brightness   Mod 2   contrast  Posterizer  Mod1 reduces color detail  Mod2  adjusts contrast   Color to Black  amp  White  Mod1 fades color RGB   0 to B W  50  to white  100   Mod2  not  used    107   Visual Mode   Fire Gradient  Mod1fades original to converted  Mod2 not used  reserved   Negative Art  Mod1 fades from original image to  converted image  Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128   subtracts green from 129 255   Exposure Control  Mod1 adjusts color contrast
81. O for the 3 D Object  Media Folder  and Media File parameters  The selected media  file will be mapped onto the selected 3 D object     To output an image from a DL 2 fixture     1  Open the mechanical iris by setting the Dimmer parameter to full  10096   2  Set the Global Intensity parameter to full  100     3  Set the Object opacity to full  100    4  Adjust the Object  Media Folder  and Media File parameters to greater than zero  When programming with Wholehog software  the Media Folder and Object parameters default to    1 so choosing any Media File DMX value from 1 35 will display a media loop from the HES Core  folder  Media Folder 1  wrapped on a Flat Plane  Object 1      Remember  The Dimmer  Opacity and Global Intensity Parameters all have to be  greater than zero before the image you create becomes visible        DL 2 User Manual 43    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    Content Selection Parameters    The following sections outline parameters you will use to create an image from content and  define it   s playback  You will set the parameters described in this chapter for each individual  Graphic Object you define     Note  The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended  to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection   rendering and output  They are the default values built into the Wholehog  libraries for High End Systems consoles     Object    The Object parameter selects the 3 dimensional 
82. Options Descriptions    Sinewave  Horizontal w X axis Wobbulation  Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   67    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Horizontal w Y axis Wobbulation    object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   68    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation M Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   69    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitu
83. RRARRSEEEERARSERERRRRRRRRRRRARRARRARRE 25  BMAX TaD SsacindeVesdschscesebir Tad adel er dncuo A aee a Ud adr pidan iata aA MAU 25  DMX Control SeFeeli eecoxiia tno da et A et ptiivi oce Pa e VERE e HU dvvcOC D e 25  DMX  PFOtoCOL  Ta Ot airone Tn E EEA e pad eate I pda E Reda QUK V aal 26  DMX  Protocol Motion SO eeN   sechs sra oes D Vraceccidtsoka Jd oc Deed Eccc nt 26  DMX Protocol Global SCreen ia rica e ou p UNEUEH e DU Cr Pre rn pU ce GIRO ad 26  DMX  Protocol   ODJ SCl eens usi oaa C OU NES e nc RON CR CREAR RA USER 26  DMX RAW SCEE Mr UU 27   SPE TAD eC Te 28  SEE FRUS  SCOE ce p  28   SEE Projector STEEN  ainera a e O orients 29  AEREE T RU 30  MES ea area E E EAEE EA MD A AN E 31  Fest HOME SCIEN naenin koni a a a a a led pri EE dae 31  TeSt Ser Test Screebl Carin a C nada V SO an E A elas 31       X DL 2 User Manual       fea  EU ETERNI MERE EUER VR URINE EAA 32    Info HOOFS user EMEN Er ah tt anat o OO de OUR Re Ra nn SO e ERR ate E a tu tists 32  tO  Version Scl eel  ccu cum otenian onan uis A AUR emma ad aida Mau Uu O A 32  Info Status Tab saevus ames arta iris Sia or pag scaduta ane roa cO  GE EE QR E 32  biscipmpeldg   M c DE 33    Chapter 4  DMX Programming Basics  If you are new to DMX programing  this chapter will give you a brief overview  and tips on programming DL 2 fixtures with Wholehog consoles from High End    Systems    DMX Programming Overview                       eere sehen ena hhnn nnn na uuum u aun nna 35  DNIXS EZ DI St dta vete foa nbi m nac
84. RRESRCEMEEENEQUM VENE Cu IY MR CRURA OR RR OR D RR CR GR RO RR E RR 119  Dimmer          e esesurewvwswaseeweusaweUvaeussvavEVezEEXUeSFESEEEWRRSeEEEEERRREESSERXFERRAKRR NER EF E ENNE 119  FOCUS xissvixicevevvesieseveu even RV WOO HOO OI VOR CRGO URGE ER RE GR EG RW TW WW 119  ZOOM ion sawti idecededadacecsdesecseucnenavancutecwcacwsuuwensstet tot VER TREE rrr reU vr VE EEEEEEEEEFEEEEEEKEREE 119  MSpeed  Motor Speed  iini ise vau PauaNREeEERRPe e wEEESRPRTRRRRRRERERE YE RRRRRRRR RR RAN VR WV aw ini 120  Control FUNCHON OPtionss    1 1  1 iscueccupxousE sue EERaN ERE cece ne wn CREECEFEKUUAFEE AEN UC Ced E Ead a s 120  Fixture ODSFatloOLiS  irrite i Ee atomis ta deis umque Cx erba Rc n tein 120  Projector CONTO MESSER TI M ETT 121  Control Parameter Projector Options                 ssssssssese enne 121  Using the Internal Projector s Menu               sssssssss mee 122       DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 13  Live Video Input and Control  The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video from an external source or its own  integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide  a direct digital video feed option     Live VId6eo SOUEFCOS  rrio XR D EN ORNA QR S A RR C M ERR RR RR ARA RR OL UR 123  Hitema Canen ah mncindanceaan paskadatidunes vaughn TT TUmmemMAAT 123  Other vided S OUI COS  xssdda ddaudona tea ep Wo E Pada Pu ale gc aa ara blam 123   Live Video Connection Options         o oiu uasuanuanusnansu RR RERRaRRRRERRRaRaR suu sw usd du uu n RA 124   Conf
85. S   AN Disconnect power before servicing     Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only   Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to  ANA 130   C  266   F   Allow the fixture to cool before    E    handling     The DL 2 fixture is designed with two motor driver boards     1  The board that controls the motors for the tilt  focus  zoom  and iris functions as well as  fans is located in the fixture head     2  The board that drives pan motor and fans is located in the base housing     All cabling is marked with labels corresponding to locations on board for easy replacement   When changing a board  align the screw holes and standoffs to ensure correct orientation in    the fixture     CAUTI ON   The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws    are missing from driver boards        DL 2 User Manual 155    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Fixture Head Driver Board  To replace the fixture head driver board     l     2  3   4      Carefully replace the rear bezel  making sure to place  but do    Disconnect power to the fixture and allow it to cool       Unlatch the two rear latches and remove the rear bezel     Use a 3 mm allen wrench to remove the addressing screws and star washers       Position new board against module aligning the center top standoff  Place contact screw s     in the appropriate position     Note  When installing a replacement driver board on a module   always place a star washer between an address screw  and the pad on
86. Standard Protocol   170 channels  e Dual Protocol   132 channels  e Single Protocol   94 channels    Use data grade cable and 5 pin XLR cable connectors  Data grade cable is designed to carry a  high quality signal with less susceptibility to electromagnetic interference and less degradation  over long distances  For cable and connector specification  see Cable and Connector  Specifications on page 225     Test each cable with a voltage ohm meter  VOM  to verify correct polarity and to make sure that  the negative and positive pins are not grounded or shorted to the shield or to each other     CAUTION      Do not connect anything to the ground lug on the XLR connectors     Do not connect or allow contact between the common  cable shield   and the fixture   s chassis ground  Grounding the common could cause  a ground loop and  or erratic behavior     Setting up a Standard DMX Link  To link one or more fixtures to a DMX controller   1  Connect the male XLR connector of a DMX Data cable to the controller   s DMX Data Out  connector     2  Connect the Data cable s female XLR connector to the Data In connector of the first  or  next  fixture on the DMX link     3  Continue linking the remaining fixtures connecting a cable from the Data Out connector of  each fixture to the Data In connector of the next fixture on the link        10 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Connect a male terminator to the Data Out connector of the last fixture in the link  See Powe
87. Tab Select button corresponding to the  screen you want and press the   Enter   button to  select     Use the multidirection button to move left right up   down to a field  The currently selected field will be  highlighted        Press the   Enter   button to go into edit mode the    UUUUUL    HIGH END SYSTEMS  selected field and a list box will open to show all the          options for that field  Tab    Escape Enter Select    Use the Up D keys t l  th h the it    se the Up Down keys to scroll throug e items in Buttons    the list highlighting the current item  Pressing the Navigation    Enter   button again stores the selection and buttons  closes the list     To edit a field  press the   Enter   button to pop open the drop down list where up down selects  the item  Pressing   Enter   again commits the change  Pressing the   Escape   button instead  of   Enter   leaves the original setting and closes the list     To return to a high tab level  press the left direction on the Navigation button        DL 2 User Manual 21    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    DL 2 Menu Options    The menu display consists of a set of top level tabbed screens and their associated subtabs     Main Sub Tabs  Fields    DMX512   Sets DMX as fixture communication source  Source Art Net Set Universe field from 0 16  Art Net protocol   Set Subnet field from 0 16  Art Net protocol   Standard Motion   global   3 objects   170 channels  Gani Protocol Motion   global   2 objects   132 channels  Motion   g
88. Tilt the connector panel away from the box  4  Remove the fuse from the fuse holder     5  Replace the fuse with a 5A  slow blow fuse  only        6  Replace the side and top panels     Cleaning or Replacing the Front Windoui    WARNINGS   Disconnect power before servicing     f Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to     Gil Gs     130   C  266   F   Allow the fixture to cool before  handling     To access the front Phillips screws Phillips head screws    window  and washers    1  Remove the four  phillips head  screws  two on  each side of the  front bezel     2  Slide the bezel  from the front of  the fixture           154 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    3  Disconnect power to infrared illuminator     4  Inside the bezel  locate the two Phillips head screws and washers securing the front window  in place     5  Remove the screws  making sure not to misplace the washers     6  Clean the front window using a mild glass cleaner  containing no ammonia  and a soft  lint   free cotton cloth     7   f the window needs replacement  use the part specified in Related Products and Optional  Accessories on page 3     8  Carefully replace the Phillips screws and washers  making sure not to break the glass     CAUTI ON   Use plastic washers only when replacing the front    glass  Using metal washers can damage the glass     9  Reconnect power to the infrared illuminator    10  Replace the front bezel     Replacing Motor Driver Boards    WARNING
89. Xels  quscdssespaetui dad usdbw ka pul nS c vapor ety EN EE ra puluis Dad C Magius 100  RG Boh qup   m 100  BGB Invert ahd  Swap to BRG  i255 eo eta aon Melt Se atuioie D obe bur nS die  100  RGB Inverbahnd Swap to GBR  oxssexiatietuneet unt ooPd p ea adde ur REI disiceeto v rdv 101  PGBS CONS  e c 101  RGB SWa  ap  tO BGR   ci aestate on diac e a e aded e emu un een Rau ng da t p cn d cones 101  RGB SWdD EO BRG 3 bite e IEEE E E ub UL cr LECCE EDEN 102  RGB  SWap to  GBR eie t et REA BRE a SER un ach etotesu a eda vea A 102  RGB SWODEO GRB  wscntaaceconauais b DO dbuo tula ei ditti huie oa Mo itus ola MM t Enea Rd du UE 102  RGB SWap  TO RBG oeira stant esed Pup DUM a A AL ebeduhe dub bei quus Se Padum UE 103  Scanibifigvss oos b n ub pede eect a d css E Amet DL CE AS tason de t msec gaa 103  SOME MT P d 103  Soldi d td ee eee ee eee eer PS Ee eau EE E DINE 104  SO IZ eS uct deat c DEP 104  SOlI ZO  ET 104  DOUG COF ROB aoii er RR 105       xiv DL 2 User Manual    Geometric Effect ODTIONS over osusix x Eurus edv aReRsRsEsususFaksvs E RERPRCWESERRREBER MRERENE rues 106    Cartooh Ede  viec uos EE Oo otc Od e Rv dead hie eed a ciae E mid rue ua 106  Colladge GelgratOoFP 2 299 0 09d Moro wende este duic E a Ria etis 106   Central Panoramoa   Collage  cccieeuwid oaa etd adotta ovid icit Rama dba efe 106   Horizontal Panorama Collage        ccccccccccccceeeeee eee eee eeeeeeeee menn 107   Vertical Panoramas Collage ssir erite ea iei a 107  Edge Detect    Black and WICC    isset o
90. adjustment       108 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Horizontal Mirror M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   40    This option splits the image vertically and mirrors the image alongside it   s original     Modifier 1  The default DMX value of 128  50   sets the mirror center point at the center of  the screen  Values below the midpoint move the mirror center point toward the left as you  approach 0  Values above the midpoint move the mirror center point toward the right as you  approach 255  100       Modifier 2  Not Used  Modifier 3  Not Used     Magnifying Lens M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   36    This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a virtual  convex lens effect over a portion of the image  You can adjust the size of the lens and move it  over different areas of the image     Modifier 1  Controls the horizontal position of the lens    centerpoint from O left edge to 255   100     right edge of output     Modifier 2  Controls the vertical position of the lens    centerpoint from O top edge to 255   10096    bottom edge of output     Modifier 3  Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255  100     largest     Magnifying Lens e M Object Effect     v  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   37    This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a doubled  virtual convex le
91. akes the  surface of some 3D objects appear reflective     Modifier 1  Adjusts algorithm   Modifier 2  Adjusts algorithm   Modifier 3  Adjusts algorithm        dge Fade Color C Object Effect     v  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   129    This option applies color to a selected Edge Fade parameter   see Image Edge Fade on page 86     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation     Glow M Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   73  Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it  You    can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it  This  parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without displaying the associated texture     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation        DL 2 User Manual 97    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Glow Color Cycle M Object Effect  Global 
92. al  Effect 1    Global Functions  are then applied to the  composite object image     Global  Effect 2    Edge Fade    Keystone  Correction    Global  Viewpoint    Global  Intensity    Graphics Engine outputs final image  to DL 2 fixture s internal projector       40 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 5  Graphics Engine Overview    Graphics Engine Functions    Object Graphic Functions   For an individual object  you can control      The media file and 3 D object selection for the layer    Media playback including        What portion of the movie plays      Playback speed      Playback mode  direction and style of playback       The object transparency  opacity     Visual Effects including colormixing and geometric effects  e Synchronization    e Image Rotation  Scale and Position    Global Functions    Global controls are applied to composite image created by multiple 3 D images  For the  combined image  you can       Adjust the composite image intensity level     Apply visual effects including colormixing and geometric effects     Select a mask shape  size it and apply edge fades and color to the mask    Apply and color mix an image edge fade     Control keystone correction      Establish the point in 3 D space from which image will be viewed    Making Graphics Effect Choices    Because you have control of many parameters  there are sometimes several ways to accomplish  the same look  For Example  to make an object appear larger  you can scale it along the x  y and  Z axis  or you 
93. an scroll through the Content folders  and the files inside each folder to preview any  content file        30 DL 2 User Manual    Test Tab    Test_Home Screen   Homing sets a fixture to it   s default posi   tioning  The fixture automatically homes  whenever it is connected to power     You can manually home all or separate  mechanical functions using this menu tab       Motion All option on this manually homes  the entire fixture       Motion Pan  Tilt homes only pan and tilt  positions        Motion lris  Zoom  Focus sets the Iris   Zoom and Focus to default     Set DMX    Info File     Rst Test    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Motion All _Home _  Motion Pan Tilt Home  Motion Iris Zoom Focus Home      Calibrate Motors Calibrat      Calibrate Motors realigns the Pan and Tilt stepper motors after maintenance procedures     The DL 2 can also be remotely homed via a DMX controller   see Control Function Options on    page 120  or through the Content Management Application   see Editing Configuration Values    on page 144      Test Self Test Screen   You can check the mechanical functionality of  Pan  Tilt  I ris  Zoom  and Focus assemblies  on the fixture head  Select On to start the test  sequence     The Video Test option opens the mechanical  iris and provides test patterns to check the  projection functionality  This lets you verify  that the graphics engine is operating without  having to use a DMX controller     Set DMX   Sek Test Home    Info File    Rst  Test    S
94. and conventional dimmers  This protocol consists of 512 unique channels of  control per output link  universe   Typically a lighting fixture or device will use a channel for  each parameter s function  Each channel consists of 256 values ranging from 0 to 255  The  lighting console is programmed to transmit a corresponding DMX value for the desired  function of each parameter  All DMX values are stored within in the lighting console  and  typically are referred to as cues  scenes  or presets  A lighting console locates a fixture on the  link by it   s DMX Start Channel     Determining a DMX Start Channel    The DMX Start Channel is the first channel of a fixture   s channel range on a DMX link  There  are 512 available channels on each DMX universe divided among all the devices in a particular  universe  A fixture must have a unique DMX Start Channel number in order to respond  independently to controller commands     To determine each fixture   s DMX Start Channel  identify the footprint of every fixture on the  universe  The fixture   s footprint is the number of consecutive DMX channels a fixture requires  and is determined by the channels in the fixture   s protocol     The fixture   s DMX channel range must not overlap any other device   s channel range on the  link  When two devices on the same DMX universe have overlapping channel ranges  one or  both devices will be disabled or behave erratically     8 bit vs  16 bit DMX Parameters    Most parameters of an automated l
95. ard   e DL 2 Stock content obtained by contacting High End Systems Customer Support    For a partial system restore  you will also need     External USB CD drive     USB keyboard   Optional components for system restore       USB mouse  which may require the addition of a USB hub        DL 2 User Manual 163    CHAPTER 16  Restoring the System    Full System Restore    A full system restore will replace the entire contents of the DL 2 hard drive  including       Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System    DL 2 application     DL 2 settings     DL 2 Stock content    This type of restore should be used when you are trying to restore the fixture to factory state     Note  After a full system restore  all user content will be absent  You will  need to re transfer it to your fixture through the DL 2 CMA  Also  a  full restore requires a USB DVD drive and takes between 45   90  minutes longer to perform than a partial restore  depending on the  speed of your USB DVD drive     Partial System Restore  Preserving Content     A partial system restore will replace the following components     Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System    DL 2 application    The partial restore does not replace the DL 2 settings  the DL 2 Stock content  or User  content  As such  the partial system restore option exists as a convenience for users who are  trying to restore their fixture s OS and application  but who need to preserve the content or  settings on the DL 2 fixture  This type of restore al
96. ard menu system  see DMX Tab on page 25        DMX  Protocol Selection    Standard Protocol    Dual Protocol  Single Protocol    Image Optimizing Controls       Images can now be optimized for each cue  It is no longer necessary to pre optimize images  with a separate software system on a separate computer when preparing for a show  You can  adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for each image     Graphics Control Hierarchy    There is a hierarchy to the DMX control parameters  In general  object control parameters  render individual graphic images  Global control parameters act upon the composite image  created by combining multiple objects  Motion parameters control the fixture movement and  projection as well as live video feed from the internal camera     It is especially important to keep this in mind when applying graphical effects  At the lowest  level  Layer effects are applied to individual 3 D layers  Any Global effects applied affect each  object in the combined Object image  Finally  motion effects control the projection of the  composite image        DL 2 User Manual 39    CHAPTER 5  Graphics Engine Overview    Graphic Engine Function Flow    A 3 D object ru pU Po    Object Object Object  with a texture 1 2 3  is selected Content Content Content     s N Nd                     Opacity    Opacity    Opacity               Graphic  FIG NDBON Playback Playback  Functions yy        are applied Visual Mode Visual Mode Visual Mode    to each objec    Glob
97. are three invert control options     e On manually inverts the display and navigation buttons    Off manually turns off the display invert function      Auto sets the display to invert automatically when the fixture is rotated more than 45  off  the horizontal axis  This is the default setting    The Multiple SVideo Format field lets you designate which SVideo format the fixture will accept    DL 2 fixtures support multiple SVideo formats including     NTSC M SECAM B  SECAM K   NTSC MJ SECAM D   SECAM K1  SECAM G      SECAM L            PALN     SECAMH   SECAM L1    Note  The format must be set to NTSC M to receive input from the internal camera        Restoring Factory Defaults  Selecting On in the Factory Defaults field restores all factory default fixture settings     Set Projector Screen z 5 Prol i Intemal 1  st put In i     The projector tab provides settings related to     E keeled      Y    the internal projector functionality  A F Projector In By DMX      i  E Projector Lamp On i   Use the Projector Input option to select 5 Projector Powerup DMX      which input the projector should accept  When   i Lm B  Zoom Override 128 3 Off    rem     External is selected  the projector takes input  gt   gt  l d     1  directly from an external source and bypasses 4 Focus Override 128 aO 3  the internal graphics engine  When Internal   Projector Ceiling Off j  is selected  the projector takes input directly     Projector Rear Off j  from the graphics engine  Internal is the Proje
98. as Modifier 1     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1        92 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Chromakey Coarse M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   28    A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another     behind    it  The removed color becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color  you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red  Green and Blue values  The Chromakey  Coarse parameter selects a color range  40  either side of the defined value     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0   no red to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0   no green to 255   100     maximum green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0   no blue to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Chromakey Coarse  Inverse M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   31    A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another     behind    it  The removed color becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color  you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red  Green and Blue values  The Inverse  Chromakey Coarse parameter selects a color range  40  either side of the defined value and  then sets every other color as chromak
99. at any new content you obtain from outside  sources is properly cleared for public presentation     This sounds really difficult and   don t know how to do it  What do I do to properly license  copyrighted material     You need to consult with a Content Clearing House or with a properly licensed Intellectual Property Attorney   Content clearinghouses are typically less expensive to work with and have well established industry relations  that can result in cost savings  High End Systems uses and highly recommends Suzy Vaughan Associates   Suzy Vaughan Associates has 20 years of experience in clearing clips  talent  and music for use in any number  of venues  Their clients include Barbara Streisand  Michael Jackson  and The Emmys among other shows        DL 2 User Manual vii    You can obtain more information about Suzy Vaughan Associates    services by calling 818 988 5599 or  emailing info suzyvaughan com  Their website is www suzyvaughan com  Suzy Vaughan is also an attorney  specializing in intellectual property issues     How much does it typically cost to license copyrighted material     The answer depends entirely on what material you want to use and how you plan to use it  Prices can range  from hundreds of dollars for photography content to thousands of dollars for a highly desirable film video clip   Since price is content sensitive  the best thing to do is to contact a clearinghouse like Suzy Vaughan  Associates and let them find out for you        viii DL 2 User Man
100. atus Message Menu Display               ssssssssseseeen eme nensem nn 157   jsidrolg i elio RT LEE oL a mE 158  laid vila MN eC    tm 158  Supported Error Warning Messages            sssssssssssss memes 158  System Stale LEDS uto er ivan ope bte bd oae uA PE  ev ima pue e PR Ub EP CL ppp M d 160  Board LED States  cousssstastids iudeio ots tbt b emt mdp bebes uota sciet puse d e mit 160  General Troubleshooting Suggestions             sssrsssrrssrersrererrrerrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrererere 160  Frequently Asked Questions                 ssssssssssssseee eee eee sees memes nennen nnn 162    Chapter 16  Restoring the System  There are two types of system restore that you can perform on the DL 2 with  your DL 2 System Restore CD  a  full  system restore or a  partial  system    restore   Full System ReSEOFG   10 x veEcue uc Rd bRUREERRRRREUEFa ER RRRAPRREERRRRERRVRRRRRRaRN ERR nanara 164  Partial System Restore  Preserving Content                                   enn 164  Performing the System Restore                            ee essseseee nean nnne n nna nnn 165  Appendix A  DL 2 DMX Protocol                                  eene enne 169    This table describes the Standard  Dual and Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures     Appendix B  MSpeed Conversion Table                                      eere 219  This table lists the MSpeed  motor  movement times and their corresponding  DMX controller values     Appendix C  Custom User Content  There are several considerations to keep in min
101. axis in 32769     4 74  adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151   Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around Z axis  slow to fast  65535    Graphic 3 Scaling    Minimum object size along X axis  1 10    oO   0   Increases object size along X axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  2 128   50    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0  0 24  object rotation around Z axis  fast to slow  16382  32768  50    Actual size along X axis  1 1     Increases object size along X axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along X axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Y axis  1 10  o o   Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 1 127 1 49  to actual size  163   Scale Y 128   50    Actual size along Y axis  1 1     Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Y axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Z axis  1 10  Le  a  Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  4 128   50    Actual size along Z axis  1 1     Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along Z axis  10 1           216 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 3 Position    Moves object left from center of display 0 36767  Centers object along X axis in display 32768 32768  50    Moves object right from center of display vanes 51
102. becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color  you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red  Green and Blue values  The Inverse  Chromakey Medium parameter selects a color range  25  either side of the defined value and  then sets every other color as chromakeyed     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from 0   no red to 255  100     maximum red  Saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from 0   no green to 255  100     maximum  green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from 0   no blue to 255  100     maximum  blue saturation        94 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    CMY M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   1    This parameter simulates CMY color by inverting RGB color components  Use this parameter  when you want to color mix with a CMY color model instead of RGB color model     Modifier 1  Increases cyan color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum cyan saturation     Modifier 2  Increases magenta color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum magenta saturation     Modifier 3  Increases yellow color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum yellow saturation     CMY Add All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   2    This effect increases color values across all pixels including black pixels     Modifier 1  Increases cyan color component from 0   no a
103. both individual Graphic object and Global control     Most of the effect options you will find described in this chapter are available for Effects 1 and  Effect 2 parameters at both the graphic control level for each Graphic Object as well as the  Global control level for the composite image  The following pages describe all the Effect Mode  options available along with a description of how each Modifier parameter functions with that  mode selected     Check boxes in the upper right hand corner indicate W   Object Effect MGlobal Effect  whether this mode is available as a Graphic Object Effect     a Global Effect or both     Because the options for Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode are identical  you can apply up to  two options at the graphic level and another two options at the global level  This lets you  choose  for example  whether to apply a color effect option to an individual object or to the  composite image at the global level     After you select a mode using either a Graphic Object Effect Mode or a Global Effect Mode  parameter  you can use the three associated Modifier parameters to adjust the effect  The  behavior of the Modifier parameters depends upon the selected effect       For a general information on Graphics Control features  see Graphics Engine Overview on  page 39       For a table of graphic level Effects parameter options  see Effect 1 and Effect 2 on page 76       For a table of global level Effects parameter options  see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effe
104. can apply a global control to zoom in on the z axis from a viewpoint that makes  the object seem to increase in size     Which solution you choose depends  to a large extent  on the transition to other effects you  want to achieve        DL 2 User Manual 41    CHAPTER 5  Graphics Engine Overview       42    DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 6     Graphic Functions  Defining Content    Each Graphic Object   s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media  file  This chapter outlines how to select an image   s object and media file  components as well as define the video segment and its playback     Selecting Content    How Content is Organized    The media server on each fixture has a file system that holds the Windows OS  movies  images  and 3 D objects that make up the content that the SM All Sewers  4 servers   server uses  These files  folders  and their associated DMX values    B  are collectively known as the  Content  on the fixture       User Content  C User Objects  The Content Management Application  CMA  organizes and 442  Stock Content  identifies content by source  preloaded Stock content or custom  Cj Stack Objects  User content  and type  Media files or 3 D Object files   For more ane  1   information on using the CMA to view and manage content  see dia    Content Management Application  CMA  on page 127      All Configuration       Selecting Content    Three Parameters control Content selection  To define an image you have to set DMX values  greater than 
105. content used  with the DL 2 fixture    By Suzy Vaughan Associates for High End Systems     I want to use a film clip from  When Harry Met Sally  in a promotional piece advertising my  services  What do   have to do to be able to do that     First of all  you need to obtain permission to use the clip from its owners  The clip is considered intellectual  property  just as though it were your car or some software code developed by and belonging to Microsoft  This  is because the U S  Copyright Act gave creators of literary works  which include books  films  television  programs  art works  still photos and musical compositions and recordings  the right to sell or license these  works and to make money from them for the period of the copyright     But what about public domain material    heard that lots of material is in the public domain and  can be used for free     Once the copyright runs out  the creative work falls into the public domain and can be used freely by anyone  without payment or licensing  If the work is not public domain  it is considered literary property  The  Copyright Act provides substantial penalties for copyright infringement ranging from  10 000 for accidental  infringement to  250 000 for willful infringement  However  contrary to popular belief  there really is not that  much material in the public domain so this approach will limit you creatively     What if   want to use a clip in a public performance  It s not being filmed or taped  Surely   don t  n
106. ct  Mode 2 on page 80     Color Conversion  Both Object and Global Effect parameters include options for swapping  colors to provide quick color conversions  Use the following DMX Values in any of the Effect  parameters to make these color conversions        DMX Value Conversion Effect  7 Red Green Green     Blue Blue     Red  8 Red     Blue Green     Red Blue     Green  17 Red Cyan Green     Magenta Blue     Yellow  18 Red     Magenta Green     Yellow Blue     Cyan  19 Red Yellow Green     Cyan Blue     Magenta  41 Red     Blue Green     Green Blue     Red  42 Red     Red Green     Blue Blue     Green  43 Red     Green Green     Red Blue     Blue       DL 2 User Manual 91    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Effect Mode Color Options    All or Nothing M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   15    This option reduces all color values to full saturation or no color based on comparison to a set  threshold  This effect creates an image with fully saturated color     Modifier 1  Compares the red component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full  color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold     Modifier 2  Compares the green component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to  full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold     Modifier 3  Compares the blue component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to  full color if 
107. ctor  it can not be applied to both at  the same time     This setting will be retained until you change it or restore the factory  defaults     For more information on configuring and previewing the internal camera feed  see Integrating    Live Video and other Media with DL 2 at http   www highend com  products   digital lighting  dl 2 asp    Controlling the Internal Camera Input    Several parameters allow you to control and apply effects to the Internal camera input     Camera Zoom   The Camera Zoom parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the  camera s zoom function  This includes an 18x optical and 12x digital zoom for a total of 216x  combined zoom range  You can adjust the Camera Zoom parameter from In  DMX value   0   to Out  DMX value   65535     Camera Focus   The Camera Focus parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the  camera   s focus function  Auto focus for the camera is active when DMX values   0 511  The  camera focus can also be manually adjusted from In  Far End  DMX value   512 to Out  Near  End  DMX value   65535     IR Illuminator   The DL 2 fixture is equipped with an illuminator that can output infrared  IR  light  The   IR Illuminator parameter controls both the IR illuminator output and the camera   s infrared  sensing option  DMX values   0   63 turn the illuminator off and set the camera to sense the  visible light spectrum  From DMX values   64 127  the illuminator remains off  but the  camera   s Auto IR f
108. ctor OSD Menu Activate    default configuration setting  Projector Defaults   Reset            Setting the Projector In By DMX field to Yes sets DMX as the projector s input source   The Projector Lamp field lets you manually turn the lamp On or Off     Use the Projector Powerup to choose the control option for turning the lamp on  The options  are  ALWAYS ON  MANUAL  DMX  This only takes effect when the fixture powers up       Always On turns the projector lamp on when the fixture starts up regardless of whether  there is a DMX Art Net signal  If there is no DMX Art  Net signal the lamp shuts off when the  shutdown timeout period expires       Manual turns on the projector lamp only when set to On via DMX  Menu or the CMA        DL 2 User Manual 29    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    e DMX only turns the lamp on when it receives a DMX signal or Art Net signal connected  to it     When the internal projector menu is selected for display  you may need to manually adjust the  zoom and  or focus parameters to view the display clearly  The Zoom Override and Focus  Override options override the DMX values sent by the console and allow you to control Zoom  and focus manually with a DMX decimal value between 0 255     Projector Ceiling rotates the image 180 degrees so you can adjust for whether the fixture is  hung in the air or sitting on the floor     Projector Rear projects a mirror invert of the image    Projector Menu Command   Default      LANGUAGE ENGLISH  CEILING OFF    fo
109. d  You can add single  files or multiple files  To add multiple files  hold down shift and select multiple media files  with your mouse        138 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     5  Click Add Objects if you wish to add custom 3 D objects to the archive  This will again  bring up a file browser window to navigate to you 3 D objects  Any 3 D objects added will  appear in the right hand column of the wizard  3 D objects do not get added to folders     6  Click Next at the bottom of the wizard  This will take you to another screen where you  choose where to save and what to name your archive     7  Click Browse to navigate to where you want to save and name your archive   8  Click Next  Your archive will then be created     NOTES  The Remove Media and Remove Object buttons can be used to  remove media files and objects from the wizard when creating the  archive     Currently  the archive will not be created unless each media folder  created has at least one media file in it     All media folders  files and objects will be assigned DMX addresses  in alphabetical fashion     For CMA Running Mac OS 10 4   To create a Local Archive  you must first create the folder structure recognized by the CMA   The Creative Local Archive compresses these files into a  dlc format that can be recognized for  uploading  Use the following folder structure in preparing files for a local Archive       A top level folder  which contains a Media and Objects folder 
110. d when creating custom content  to control with the DL 2 graphics engine software     Creating Video Media Files                            eeeeeeeeeeee enn a nnne nan n nnns 221  Creating  3 D ODIGCES  oria a VERAM M NEM AREE r a nanan n DN REA 221  Managing Custom Content                          eessssseeeea annnm naa a aine u nina 222    Appendix D  DL 2 Specifications  Fixture mechanical  electrical  optical and component cpecifications are listed     Mechanical gem                          223  Electrical Specifications 2  us isisisa so sui oU ERERRRRRRRRDRRRRRRRRUARRRARRRREERESRRRECPEEERSES 224  Projector Specifications   casita 2 s aaa aaa aah Ea Rant na FEE FEKEFIVIEFEKER 224  Camera Module Specification                           eeeeesseeeeee nnne nean n nnn nanus 224  Environmental Specifications       ioo eeu n ep raosE uu FREE us REPRrisERRERrEVERRRND A E E a A UE 224       xviii DL 2 User Manual    Cable and Connector Specifications          ssssssssssussss202u202usuuuunununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 225    Video  Connectors  wetivces cade considers UU Res aes cua etreb epo dus dey Pet egiuia daa Re rud a ta E 225  Peripheral  Network Connectors              sssssssseeseee nennen nnns 225  DMX and RS 485 Projector Link         cccccece cece eee ee eee e ee ee emnes 225    Appendix E  Safety I nformation    Appendice E  Importantes Informations Sur La S  curit               c ccc eee cena cena ee eees 228  Anhang E  Wichtige Hinweise F  r Ihre Sicherheit                  
111. d3   gt  blue     DotP and Resample  Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3  control resampling     Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue     All or nothing  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue  If color value  gt  mod value   color   255  else color   0    Solid color RGB  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue     RGB Invert Mod1   red to inverted red   Mod2   green to inverted green  Mod3   blue to  inverted blue          172 DL 2 User Manual    Global  23   Effect 1    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR  Mod1   red to  inverted green  Mod2   green to inverted blue   Mod3   blue to inverted red    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG  Mod1   red to  inverted blue  Mod2 7 green to inverted red   Mod3   blue to inverted green   Edge Detect Color  Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold  Edge Detect B W  Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold  Texture Ripple  Horizontal   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Texture Ripple  Vertical   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Fine 
112. de  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset       112 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Sinewave  Vertical w X axis Wobbulation M Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   70    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Vertical w Y axis Wobbulation  v   Object Effect        Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   71    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the 
113. dia and Stock Objects ships with every DL 2 fixture and will also be  provided through upgrades from High End Systems  This content is read only  You won t be  able to download  edit the DMX values or remove these files from the fixture     Custom User Content   You can create your own custom User Media and User Objects content  and upload it to  fixtures  The Stock Content and User Content reside in separate folders  The High End  Systems Digital Lighting Community  forums highend com  is a resource for tips and  techniques on creating User Content  See Custom User Content on page 221 for basic    considerations in developing your own content for the DL 2 fixture     Media Files  Inside User Image and Stock Image folders are Library folders containing collections of media  files  Media files can be still images or video clips in one of the following formats     Note  DL 2 supports  jpg formatted using RGB color  CMYK color files are  not currently supported     The stock media files provided by High End Systems have been compressed and optimized for  reliable and smooth playback from DL 2 fixtures  Each file and folder has an associated DMX       130 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     value  These values are fixed for Stock Content but must be assigned for all user created  content  See the Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 133 for more information          HighEnd DL  Management Client    File Media Files Help    HIGH END SYST
114. difier 1  Maps the image color values from no adjustment at a value of 0 to all red to  yellow tones at a value of 255  100       Modifier 2  Not Used       Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   8  Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 255  100         DL 2 User Manual 71    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Negative Art  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   9    This option provides a negative of the image and then lets you adjust the amount of color and  the red and green color components     Modifier 1  Adjusts the color level from full at a DMX value of O to the lowest level at a DMX  value of 255     Modifier 2  You must set a DMX value of 128 to see no black level adjustment  Red is  subtracted from the image at DMX values of 128 to 0  Green is subtracted from the image at  DMX values of 129   255        Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   9  Modifier 1 DMX value 0    Modifier 2 DMX value   0       fara    Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   9 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   9    Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 1 DMX value 255  100    Modifier 2 DMX value   128  50   Modifier 2 DMX value   128  50         72 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects       xposure Control    Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   10    Exposure Control adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image  for your performance environment  You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast  for a specific applica
115. djustment to 255  100      maximum cyan saturation     Modifier 2  Increases magenta color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum magenta saturation     Modifier 3  Increases yellow color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum yellow saturation     CMY Add Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   3  This effect increases color values across all pixels except black pixels     Modifier 1  Increases Cyan color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases Magenta color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 3  Increases Yellow color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation        DL 2 User Manual 95    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Color Cycle M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   14    The image s color components cycle through RGB  black  and white  When no Red Green or Blue  is added  image fades from full white  to normal image  to black  When RGB CMY is added the  image fades from the RGB value  to the image with color added     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to  255  10096  2 maximum green saturation     Modifier 3  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  
116. down for two seconds turns          the Menu display on or off  Use this in situations when         you need to turn the Menu display completely off  instead of dimming it to video black     If you turn the LCD off and then remove power to the Menu Display Adjustment Buttons  DL 2  the LCD power will restore the default  ON   when you reapply power to the fixture     Note  The LCD screen power button doesn t affect power to the fixture or  the internal projector    LCD Display Menu Options and Selection  The button furthest from the green LED is the menu button  Pressing this brings up the different  functions contained in the LCD screen itself  The screen menu options are      Picture adjusts the sharpness of the screen     Color adjusts the richness of the color     Contrast adjustment     Black Level adjustment     Tint adjustment      Restore returns the screen to the factory defaults  The other two buttons are used to adjust the currently selected function     Note  Display Black Level can also be controlled by the DL 2 menu system  see  Set Tab on page 28  or remotely through the configuration options in the  CMA  see Editing Configuration Values on page 144         20 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Navigating the Menu    Select any tab by pressing the corresponding button to the side of the display  The tab label will  be bold when selected  Use the left and right arrow keys on the navigation buttons to move to a  different screen     Press the 
117. e  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Mode 1 Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation   Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect 0 75 255    73   Effect Mode 1   Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no   9556   4 490  Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Effect Mode 1   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect  0 255   1 100  Effect Mode 1   Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers          DL 2 User Manual 187    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Off  no effects selection I  CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values   Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   RGB Add 2 All Pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    RGB Add  non black pixels   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2  gre
118. e  Mod3 comparison threshold    Texture Ripple  Horizontal  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Vertical  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using                 ll ll         NO NO    N    Q2 oO OO N N N N N N  N O  i91  gt  C2 NO   co Co N O  C1  gt  N         Effect Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  152  Mode 2 isl Cid Inverse  Sum  Select eh color  Chromakey  ors Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    C2    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area   Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center   Mod3  z direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture  center  Mod3  subpicture size    C2    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center   Mod3 lens size    oO    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center   Mod3   lens size   
119. e  To download a file or folder of User Content     1  Display the Folder or File that you wish to move in the right pane of the CMA window    2  If the destination for the file on your local drive is visible  you can simply drag and drop  the folder or file to that location or an external drive connected to your computer     OR    3  Select Copy from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click  popup list     4  Browse to the destination on your hard drive  then select Paste from the Media Files or  3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list       Mac OS X  Downloading files       You can drag single or multiple files and folders from a fixture to the  Finder     You cannot use the copy  paste  Apple C  Apple V  to move a single file  or folder from a fixture to the Finder      Mac OS X  File transfer  SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer  What this means is more than    4GB of data may be transferred  but no file can be greater than 4GB in  size        Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a DL e Fixture  You can upload User Content Media files  Media folders and 3D object files from your hard  drive to a DL 2 Server  provided they are     e A valid file format   jpg   gif   png   bmp   avi   mpg   m2v for Media Files   x for 3D Object  files     You are uploading them to the appropriate User content folder on the DL 2 fixture server    To upload content     l  Display the file or folder destination in the right pane of the CMA 
120. e  mapped onto a 3 D  object  Multiple Color and Geometric options are available in Effect Mode  Parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control     Effect Mode Color Options       5 1 elosas osea uuEoEsEREIRRRRRRRUELRARRRSECEERRRSAPEERRRRRRRUESERSRRNNE 92  AOF NOIN G uua dd ie pce ee t E UU et ea x Dec e AEE DEEE EE NATERA 92  Baek OFOUNGICOlOR rrr EDT 92  Background  Color Cycle oct ER tune vedtneancwntay dev inde Est SRsmese su ries 92  Chromakey Coarse  IVE SE   cce poteet seem Aud pa Sea aduana e ERREUR PARI E Eta 93  Ghromagkev FINE uses etuer eds ede utt odisti wp aU EU uu LU UC MUS 93  Ghromiakev Mei oss duweteticet i mtb ur ovid rona Pr ian nua ucterk dtd ULP p evan latebat 94  chromakev Medium  ThVelsQ   esvios drops on pebde latur npPr  SUesE DP Len Dbed xci eV RUPES ni PE E ances 94  CMY Add AIEPIXelS  edt e rtl a oup amat cti dante su ehe ssu cst asa pode 95  CMY Adad  Nonsblaeck PIXGIS rus cutestob niea sara oe dudo saa om teo acp pat   adiss aar on M dta tdt 95  COlOl DECONVEIGG MAC ul D RR 96  Golori2ze xGray  Scalgu uscite iene EE TTA D MILI atte Pu PESE 96  Edge Fade Color nereiskia eee D Eu xe ee x x oaa aS V Rab Eo Eesus tura xe bu 97  ejr PT T 97  INEENS KEY irene o etutbut cimus ce vacate riba bU Ape uma den wr MU d uat MDU D namo Ub MUT ide 98  Msi Geo Pop PLE 98  ROB Add  APREIS sisi cine Said ud a e EE Aa a miu tt oeste ed pid d sad 99  RGB ACG  JAIPPCelS  mereen E e dbatmet tuat E N e meuf Rua tat feste s 99  RGB Add to  Nonsblack PP
121. e lamp  is covered by a one year parts and labor limited  warranty  The lamp warranty for Christie projectors is 120 days or 500 hours whatever comes first  It is the  owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase  date  and dealer or  distributor  If purchase date cannot be provided  date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty  period        DL 2 User Manual V    Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair   It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization  RMA  number from your dealer or point of purchase  BEFORE any units are returned for repair  The manufacturer will make the final determination as to whether or  not the unit is covered by warranty     Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the  protection of such Product unit or parts  and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate  that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number  Accompany all returned  Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction  Ship returned Product  units or parts to  2105 Gracy Farms Lane  Austin  TX 78758 USA     Note  Freight Damage Claims are invalid for fixtures shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials     Freight   All shipping will be paid by the purchaser  Items under warranty shall have return shipping paid by the  manufacturer only in the Continental United State
122. e prefilters in the head and base housing to reduce  these risks to a minimum  However  you must follow these guidelines to ensure continued  operation of the fixture       Air filters  both fixture and projector  should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis   When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used  we recommend at  least a weekly check     e Do not situate DL 2 in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or  mineral oil hazer       Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fog and mineral oil     DL 2 is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is  used  rigged  and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment     Note  Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance  Will void the warranty        8 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Mounting the Fixture Upright    CAUTION    N Do not mount the fixture upright without the four rubber feet    attached   To mount the fixture upright  place the fixture on a sturdy  stable surface that will support more  than the 53 5 kg  118 Ib  weight of the DL 2 fixture  If the surface is above floor height  use  safety cables to secure the fixture to the surface     Truss Mounting  When mounting the fixture on a truss or another type of support       Verify the truss or support will handle the combined weight of all the devices on the truss       Always mount the DL 2 fixt
123. e sopra una superficie infiammabile     2  Mantenere l  apparecchio a un minimo di 1 0 metri  3 28 piedi  di distanza dai materiali  combustibili     Sostituire i fusibili usando soltanto quelli del tipo e della taratura adatta   4  Mantenere una distanza minima di 1 0 metri  3 28 piedi  dagli oggetti accesi     Questa apparecchiatura e  da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico  massima di 20 ampere     Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation  Advarsel  Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock     VIGTIGT  LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATI ON MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET a  ELLER L        DL 2 User Manual 231    APPENDIX E  Safety Information       232 DL 2 User Manual    
124. e source to allow a unique point of view  the camera also features optical  and digital zoom  frame rate and invert effects as well as freeze frame  color negative and  grayscale conversion effects  The ability to point the camera at it   s own projection combined  with adjustable zoom creates unique realtime video feedback and    hall of mirrors    effects  The  IR illuminator allows visibility  focusing  and fading in blackout situations    The Content Management Application  CMA  runs on your workstation or laptop computer  and communicates with DL 2 fixtures over an Ethernet network  The CMA lets you remotely  upload  move and clone content files  configure fixtures  and upgrade software     Features    System    DL 2 software based on Windows XP Embedded and DirectX technology      Powerful Content Management and Configuration software can remotely manage multiple  DL 2 fixtures    e Integrated Sony camera with Super HAD technology and infrared illuminator provides live  video input and output from fixture location      Supports importing of custom content including  3D objects  media files  still images  e DMX512 and Art Net support   e Remote software upgrade capability     Royalty free stock digital art collection features over 1000 lighting optimized files   e RGBHV and S Video connections accept a wide range of media device inputs       DL 2 User Manual 1    CHAPTER 1  Product Overview    Graphics Engine    e Simultaneous playback of three discrete media streams on 
125. earbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef  hrt werden  Das Ger  t enth  lt keine  wartungsbed  rftigen Teile     Dieses Ger  t geh  rt zur Klasse    Dieses Ger  t mu   geerdet werden        DL 2 User Manual 229    APPENDIX E  Safety Information    Ap  ndice        Informaci  n Importante De Seguridad    Advertencia  Para Protecci  n Continua Contra Incendios    L     Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci  n m  xima contra una  sobrecargas de 20 A     Advertencia  Para La Protecci  n Continua Contra Electrocuciones    l     Si se recibi   este equipo sin el conector de alimentacion  monte usted el conector correcto  seg  n ia clave siguente      moreno   vivo      azul   neutral     verde amarillo   tierra   Desconecte el suministro de energ  a antes de cambiar l  mparas o prestar servicio de  reparaci  n    Este equipo esta disenado para usarce en lugares secos no lo exponga a la lluvia o  humedad     Derive el servicio de reparaci  n de este equipo al personal calificado  El interior no contiene  repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario     Equipo de Clase    Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra        230    DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX E  Safety Information    Appendice        Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza    Avvertenza  Per Prevenire I ncendi    l  Questa apparecchiatura e  da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico  massima di 20 ampere     Avvertenza  Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche  1  Da non montar
126. ect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   12    This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and eliminates color above a set  threshold  Solarize options can create strong highlights     Modifier 1   ncreases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation  Red color values above the threshold are eliminated     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation  Blue color values above the threshold are eliminated     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation  Green color values above the threshold are eliminated        104 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Solid Color RGB M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   16    Solid Color RGB removes the media file texture and allows you to color mix the 3 D object to  one solid color    Modifier 1   ncreases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation     Modifier 3  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation        DL 2 User Manual 105    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Geometric Effect Options    Cartoon Edge M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   38    Outlines the
127. ed  Mod3   blue speed    129    130    131    132       T B A B AR B Q2 Q2 w Q2 Q2  N OD oO iN oo o    Oo N O O  Z   gt        DL 2 User Manual 177    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Reserved  Defaults to effect 0  Global Collage  Mod1  grid style selection  Mod2 grid 134 NA  Effect 2 portion displayed  Mod3 edge blend adjustment  Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 135 255  og   Global Effect 2 These Modifier parameters adjust the selected 0 255   0 100  Modifier 1 Global Effect 2 parameter option from no  Global Effect 2  adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Modifier 2 adjustment at 255  10096  0 295   0 100  Global Effect 2  The type of adjustment depends on the particular  Modifier 3 effect  incidi Ls    Global Mask    Round is closing from outsidein   o   o  Round is closing fom insideout   1  Rectangle closing from outsiden   2  Rectangle closing from insideout   3     Checkerboard  variation  A     Checkerboard  varaton    8  Racial wipe  varationt SSS  Racial wipe  variations  e  NA    Racial wipe varaton o  i    178 DL 2 User Manual          APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol       Oval vis dosing fom insideout   2     Osciaing ris closing fom outsdein   2  Wis 00000  39    Reserved for other installed masks  defauls t00   31 127    Periodic strobe  round    iris    mask closing from  outside in   NA          DL 2 User Manual 179    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol      32   Mask Size Adjusts mask size from fully closed to open 0 255   0 100    Mask Edae Hard edge to faded
128. ed for static mask shapes     Values of 128 255  51 100   are Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 1    reserved for strobing Mask shapes  19 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 2    Values not yet implemented default 20    Vertical panels closing from outside in 1    to 128  21 Vertical panels closing from outside in 2    22 Vertical diamonds 1    A strobing version of each simple 191   Vertical diamonds 2    peta NN   mask shape is defined in the 128 255   51 10096  DMX value range    326   154    When a strobing mask is selected   the strobe rate is controlled by the  ee UAA  the slowest   O to the fastest   255     100       Strobing Mask Shapes       Note  A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask color    see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page 80  and on page 139         DL 2 User Manual 83    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Mask Size    The Mask Size parameter defines mask size for all mask shapes   Default DMX Value  255  100     no masking effect    When this parameter is set at a value of 255  100    the mask is sized to leave the image  100  visible  When Mask Size is set at 0  the mask totally covers the composite image     Tip  Crossfading the Mask Size parameter can create unique fades to and from video black               Mask Select DMX value   0  Mask Size DMX value   255  100         Mask Select value of 0 Mask Select DMX value   1  Mask Size DMX value   128  50   Mask Size DMX value   126  50         84 DL 2 User Ma
129. edge blending but covering the full  output of the projector     192 199 Displays default alignment pattern in rectangular area with no blending     200 207 Displays default alignment pattern in rectangular area with no blending covering full  projector output       208223     223   Displays collage selection grid over defaultalignmentpatten        collage selection grid over default alignment pattern     9 255 a a T E collage selection grid over selected image movie     Edge Detect Black and White M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   21       This option displays only the edges of image components  Edges appear white  everything else  IS black     Modifier 1  Adjusts horizontal edge search size from O  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment     Modifier 2  Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0 2 no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment     Modifier 3  Adjusts comparison edge threshold from O  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment        dge Detect Color M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   20    This option displays only the edges of image components with their color values     Modifier 1  Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 2 no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment     Modifier 2  Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum adjustment     Modifier 3  Adjusts comparison edge threshold from O  no adjustment to 255  100      maximum 
130. eed  DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction  from no adjustment to 0   fastest speed     Texture Ripple  Circular M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   24    Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z axis  without affecting the underlying object  This creates an effect of concentric rippling out from the  object center     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  speed and direction  A DMX value of 128  5096  2 no  adjustment  DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255   10096    fastest speed  DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction  from no adjustment to 0   fastest speed        114 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Texture Ripple  Horizontal M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   22    Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the x axis  without affecting the underlying object     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate 
131. eed permission for that     Public gatherings require clearance whenever copyrighted data is projected to audiences  or for any use other  than just personal viewing  Concerts  trade shows  industrial shows  parties and raves are all examples of  public performance and permission must be obtained     Suppose I want to use a still photo or a magazine cover or a television clip  Do   have to obtain  permission for them too     Yes  they are also copyrighted works  whose owners must grant a license for their usage   Do   need any other permissions to use this material     In many cases you do  You may need to obtain permission to use the appearance of actors who appear in the  clip as well as pay the writers and directors of the film that your clip comes from     What about music    hear you can use 8 bars for free     8 bars for free is a fallacy that has been passed around as a fact for a long period of time  However  it isn t  true  Both musical compositions and records require licensing and payment     What about High End Systems material included with the DL 2 fixture  Do   have to clear that     No  High End Systems has worked to provide clearance for the content that is provided with the DL 2 fixture   Any materials you received directly from HES with the purchase of a new DL 2 fixture have already been  properly licensed for your use in shows and presentations  That does not  however  license you to sell this  content separately from DL 2 fixture  Also  please be sure th
132. eft edge  to 255  100     right edge of output     Modifier 2  Controls the vertical position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O top edge to  255  100     bottom edge of output     Modifier 3  Controls the direction and amount of twist  At the midpoint of the range  there is no  change in the image  The twist area and size moves counterclockwise from 128  50      smallest area to 0   largest twist area moving counterclockwise  The twist area and size moves  clockwise from 128  50     smallest area to 255  100    largest twist area moving  clockwise     Raindrop M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effects Mode parameter DMX value   46    This option simulates raindrops falling on a liquid surface   Modifier 1  Controls the drop size from 0   no drop to 255  100     maximum size     Modifier 2  Sets the random number generator seed number  This lets you create a repeatable  random sequence that will synchronize correctly when using the collage generator option  see  page 106     Modifier 3  Adjusts the raindrop creation rate from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate        110 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Sinewave  Circular w X axis Wobbulation M Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   64    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjus
133. elf Test Pan Tilt Off     Self Test Iris Off    Self Test Zoom Off    Self Test Focus off      Video Test Test Pattern 1   Off       DL 2 User Manual    31    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Info Tab    The Info tab displays current fixture information such as hardware and software versions   sensor status  total fixture and lamp hours  DMX errors  and Status values  You can also reset  Lamp and Fixture hours     Info_Hours                                        For more detailed information  see Supported    The Hours tab displays the Lamp and Fixture    z    hours of operation since the last reset  E   Lamp Hours   476  Reset  Selecting the Reset button resets the       Fixture Hours   704 Reset  associated hours to zero  Lamp hours should  amp     be reset to zero whenever a lamp is replaced  zi S  Fixture Hours information is often used to 3 z  track fixture hours for a show or a rental En  period  The number field displays the number a  of hours the fixture has been operating since  amp   the last reset  Pressing the Fixture Hours Reset      returns the value to O   Info Version Screen g          The Software Version field and Firmware i    software Version E i    Version field display software versions as  5 A Firmware Version   12048      V Major   Minor   Build  z g Windows XPe   2 0 0 l  A Fixture Name field displays a name for easy z E Pan Encd Version   L0  reference in developing your show using the   Tilt Encd Version   1 0  Content Management Application  c  
134. en  Mod3  blue    RGB Swap to BGR   Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue    Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize 2  if color value  gt  DMX  invert color   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize  if color value  lt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling     Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue     All or Nothing  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solid Color RGB  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     RGB Invert  Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR  Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG  Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green          188 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Edge Detect Color  Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Texture Ripple  Horizontal  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Vertical  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 off
135. en finden Sie  in Anhang E  Vor der Montage  dem Zusammenbau und der Intbetriebnahme dieses Gerats alle Anleitungen  sorgf  ltig durchlesen     Informazioni I mportanti Di Sicurezza  Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi  folgorazione  e infortuni sono contenute nell appendice E  Si prega di  leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di assemblare  montare e azionare l apparecchiatura     I nformacion I mportante De Seguridad   En el Ap  ndice E se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci  n continua contra incendios  descarga el  ctrica  y  lesiones personales  Lea  por favor  todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje  montaje y operaci  n de este  equipo        iv DL 2 User Manual    Symbols    The following international caution and warning symbols appear in margins throughout this manual to  highlight messages     CAUTION  This symbol appears adjacent to Caution  messages  Not heeding these messages could result in     N personal injury and  or damage to equipment     WARNI NG  This symbol appears adjacent to high  voltage warning messages  Not heeding these  messages could result in serious personal injury     fo    This symbol indicates the minimum focus distance  from a combustible object        1    3    This symbol cautions against mounting the fixture ona  flammable surface   This symbol indicates that  while operating  equipment  surfaces may reach very high temperatures  Allow the  iss fixture to cool before handling     Fog Machine Warning    Like all high quality 
136. er    On            DL 2 User Manual    27    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Set Tab    Set_Fixture Screen  Pan Invert    Off    Tilt Invert Off    mechanical iris  and controlling the LCD display        Pan Tilt Swap Off    Data Loss Timeout Iris Long      Movement Options Display 100 j On      E  D  E  e  Set the Pan Invert option On to invert the g Display Invert Auto    z       zi  The Fixture tab provides options for selecting or   3  changing fixture movement  dimming the  amp  x  T    black level and orientation     direction of the pan motor  Use this option to External SVideo Format INTSC M    coordinate movements between fixtures facing m    each other in a horizontal orientation  Off is the     Factory Defaults Off g  default setting     Set the Tilt I nvert option On to invert the direction of the tilt motor  Use this option to  coordinate movements between fixtures facing each other in a vertical orientation  Off is the  default setting     Setting Pan Tilt Swap option On swaps the pan and tilt motor operation to coordinate  movements between fixtures mounted perpendicular to each other  Off is the default setting     Timeout Options   The Dimmer Iris closes when it stops receiving DMX data for a designated time interval  The  Data Loss Timeout Iris option sets the DMX data loss time interval as Long  5 minutes  or  Short  5 seconds   Short is the default setting     After 10 minutes of no data  the fixture will shut down the projector and the motion function
137. er 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting  This chapter includes information on replacing parts  cleaning the fixture  and  some basic troubleshooting procedures     Pan and Tilt LOCKING          n inirenu ni nuvuvuwuwznussusEnsaunEsEEEEERRRAESERESERRRERRERRRRRRRRERERRRES 149  Maintaining the Filtering System                           eeeseeesee enean nnne nanus 150  ali  laser rn 150  Cleaning and Replacing Filters                  esses nmm 150  Cleaning the Base Housing Filter                cesses emen nns 151  Replacing the  FIxEUEGPIIEBE   lcd E ated ed eg io siae cede A aida estu DR apt td 151  Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter                   essssssese mmn 152  Replacing the Lamp cess eveszuwwasusvavsxdaszwssuxa E Ea vsEsssEsEuEsswaE aa 153  Replacing the   FUSE 5 5 iragiduuudsduduEa duda du RE MR E RAM IE EN ME ME M EE EE NNNM E NO AME KR MAE 154  Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window                               eee eeeeern nnn nne 154  Replacing Motor Driver Boards                            eeeeeeeenene nnn nnne a nnn nnn 155  Fixture Bead Driver Board  3er drei boa vasa dh E aeaa Rosie dona BU saos efus randa ma  156       DL 2 User Manual    xvii    Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board           cccccccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeegsgunanees 156    Troubleshooting          4 oe oseu ou eue uu uuuucEMEEEANESESREEEREMEREKXANRSESRARNARRESYZREEENREEFEEARENENA 157  Button  Shortcit GComtmmalidS  secuta met tu au sb Etre Cre etenes eoi ue esae priis 157  St
138. er of display escas 5 100 51 100    Moves object nearer from center of display 0  S rem  Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 32768 50    Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769  51 100 100  display 65535          DL 2 User Manual 193    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 2 Functions   Standard  Dual     Selects transparency level from completely   95 Opacity transparent  0  to opaque  255  0 255   0 100   255   100    Graphic 2 Content Definition    Mosen 0000  0 0   First Stock 3 D Object  flat plane  ERTES    3 D Object File  Additional Stock 3 D Objects p  2449     First User 3 D Objects    Additional User Objects   151 255  255    oO    Integrated video camera capture  The Media File 255  parameter is ignored    No selection  Media File First Media File  Additional Media Files 2 255 NM   2 255     99 Defines the beginning of a Media File segment as 0 100  100 a percentage of the movie length ree i  101 Defines the end of a Media File segment as a 0   Mo Out Frame percentage of the movie length 65235 ee    Pray forward looping contnuousy   o   0   Play forward once and hold onthe lastirame   1  Puss  Pray forward fopaciy  gt  0  hold onlastfame   3  EU oe       Pause and rewind to In Frame     and rewind to In Frame  103   Play Mode ee a    Display  the selected In Frame  Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame    Scrub  Display  the selected In Frame with  statistics    Scrub  Display  the selected Out Frame with  statistics          194 DL 2 User 
139. ess the LCD power button   see LCD Display  Adjustment Buttons on page 20        Check the Video In Video Out adapter on the video card  middle plug   connection       Check that the connectors for the composite video cable at the LCD Screen  and the Video card are seated securely     Fixture behaves erratically or     Verify that the last unit on the DMX link is properly terminated   see Setting  won t respond to DMX controll up a Standard DMX Link on page 10       To control the DL 2 with DMX  you must first enable DMX through the menu  System  see DMX Control Screen on page 25  or the CMA  see Viewing  and Editing Fixture Configuration on page 143       If you re using DMX to control the projector using its native menu system   make sure you send a safe command after each button command   otherwise  it s analogous to pressing a button on the projector menu system  and not releasing it  see page Projector Control on page 121            DL 2 User Manual 161    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Frequently Asked Questions   How are DL 2 fixture I P addresses determined   n environments that utilize  numerous DL 2s  is there risk of I P address conflicts    DL 2 fixture IP addresses are determined one of two ways     1  When using DHCP server  like router  IP is generated automatically  2  Without router IP is generated randomly by Windows called Auto IP    The generation of IP addresses is handled just as IP addresses are handled for Window  networks   Is there a 
140. esu siege I TEE OEOER D DT tra aes ee ee ir Ee 40  Graphics Engine Functlols iis roic osse nUsaEEEERERTEFEEEERERFEREEUERSERPPPEEER SESPNSERRSRSEEEE 41  Object Graphie  FUNCEONS vsus odere da 2a ee auem ac tice d  inaie ile eR Pide etai dis 41  Glopa F UNCHONS PN t 41  Making Graphics Effect Choices        ssssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 41       DL 2 User Manual    xi    Chapter 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content  Each Graphic Object   s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a  media file  This chapter outlines how to select an image   s object and media file  components as well as define the video segment and its playback     Selecting Content ooo es oa Deseo vx ddasiaslauadodswaneuecsieuauausesssaimeussnsheeeussanausussexanesen 43  How Content is Organized s coiere vota A icai darme e uti E AMA RP A 43  er izediaregtielait iqi Nr pr 43   Content Selection Parameters        ussussuusunannasuusnasnunSuSRRRRRRRRRRRARRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR     44  Gio  44  Med FOlIGEE iT CET 45   Median Folder DescripblOfiS 5  cacao eias rc anand nantngas uiae Ede eR A NC OI amatus 46  CEI zl ste MP                ec TET 47   Defining a Media File Segment                            eeeee essen nennen annnm nena anna nnn 47  In Frame and Out Frame Parameters               sssssssssseen eese nn 47  Segment Selection Examrnples    2  5 5 v nin a neve Qv ueDm d viue dao Mila UO Ra a A ci bi 48   Defining  PlayDacK speiri anea een DOPO TEE DIEE AEAEE EAEAN 
141. et 150    132 158 50  227 Lamp Hours Reset    A amem 3 07m CA wm    The following table shows the configuration values available for viewing and or editing     Note  Read Only options are for information display only and cannot be  edited  If you select or type in an option that is invalid  the OK button  will be grayed out and not selectable     AtN amp SUnmd C  AtNeUnveme O36    Closes iris when system stops receiving DMX data   Data Loss Timeout Iris Long   5 minute delay  Short   5 second delay    Disk Free Space Read only    On manually inverts display   Off reverts to default display orientation     Auto automatically inverts display when fixture is turned  more than 90 degrees vertically     Display Invert    Off turns off display  Touching any button turns it back on   Dim lowers the brightness level   Bright   full brightness level   Preview   displays currently selected content    Display Level          DL 2 User Manual 145    CHAPTER 14    Content Management Application  CMA     Configuration Item    DMX Source    Enable Focus Override    Fixture Defaults    Fixture Hours  Fixture Hours Reset    Fixture Name    Graphics Processor Current  Temperature    Graphics Processor Maximum  Temperature    Graphics Processor Minimum  Temperature    Graphics Processor  Temperature Reset    Head Current Temperature  Head Maximum Temperature  Head Minimum Temperature  Head Temperature Reset    Home Ilris Zoom Focus    Home Pan Tilt  Lamp Hours    Mainboard Current  Temperature  
142. eter DMX value   6    This effect uses the associated Modifier 1 parameter to posterize by replacing each color in  an image with the highest values of that color but expanding it only to the border of that  color  There is no bleeding or blending of colors     Note  In this visual mode  you won t see a change in the image until you  adjust the Modifier 1 parameter    Modifier 1  Adjusts color polarization level  The higher the value  the more color detail will  be removed     Modifier 2  Adjust the image contrast from 0   no adjustment to 255  10096    maximum    contrast           EN  i H   S s i  Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   6  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   6 Visual Mode Modifier  DMX value 255 100      Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   6  Visual Mode Modifier DMX value  190  75    Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100         70 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Color to B W  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   7    Begins with a white screen and fades to the original image in black and white  All color is  converted     Modifier 1  Transitions the image from full white at a DMX value of 0 to black and white at a  value of 128  50    Increasing values above 50  reveals more of the image in black and  white to complete at a value of 255  100       Modifier 2  Not Used    Fire Gradient  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   8  This option maps image colors to a Red to Yellow gradient creating a fiery effect     Mo
143. ex the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a vertical flip at  variable speeds     This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object  You can  also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the  composite image   see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 89      Default DMX Value  32768  50     No X Rotation      of  Value Function  Range  1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around X axis  fast to slow   25 Continuous rotation stop    26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around X axis in steps to    720 degrees  50 0   rotation around X axis  51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute  75 Continuous rotation stop  76   100   Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around X axis  slow to fast     Tip  Using this parameter you can turn one object through another        Original Object 1 and Object 2 X axis Rotation Applied to Object 2       DL 2 User Manual 53    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Y Rotation    The Y Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Y axis  with 16 bit precision  You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a  horizontal flip at variable speeds     This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object  You can  also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the 
144. eyed     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from 0   no red to 255  100     maximum red  saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from 0   no green to 255  100     maximum  green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from 0   no blue to 255  100     maximum  blue saturation     Chromakey Fine M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   26   A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another   behind  it  The removed color becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color    you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red  Green and Blue values  The Chromakey  Fine parameter selects a color range  15  either side of the defined value     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from 0   no red to 255  100     maximum red  saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from 0   no green to 255  10096    maximum  green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from 0   no blue to 255  10096    maximum  blue saturation        DL 2 User Manual 93    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Chromakey Fine  Inverse M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   29    A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another   behind  it  The removed color becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color  you want to select as the chromakey in terms 
145. fore cycling to the next message and continues looping through  these messages until they have been cleared internally or you interact with the menu        DL 2 User Manual 157    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Button Action  When in the large format display  pressing any    Status Message List       Proj Status   Cooling  button reverts to the normal menu display     showing the Detailed Message Display pane in  the Info_Status tab of the menu  At that point   you can view the detailed information for the      sme UDISI3A   sInoH    error  warning messages or navigate elsewhere   Inactivity Timer Status Message Detail    l D    Project t Id before i  stri  After 30 seconds of inactivity from the display i aes iE e TETAS fo I Gb  es ol  navigation editing buttons has passed  the    display returns to the large format error display  should there be any new messages to be displayed or if there is a persistent error  A persistent    y  3531  OMT jy  S  xwa       error is a case where the error condition continues to occur     The second way to view Status messages is by navigating to the Info Status screen  This  screen displays current error or status messages  If there are multiple   error  warning messages displayed  use the up down arrows to scroll through the list in the top  pane  When an item is highlighted in the top pane  the bottom pane details information  associated with that error     Supported    rror Warning Messages     issue  arge Format Message 
146. ft pane   2  Select the Server with the content you want to clone in the right pane     3  Select Clone Content from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right  click popup list  A Clone Content Wizard lets you select one or more servers on the fixture  network as the destination for the cloned content       Clone Content Wizard    HIGH END SYSTEMS    Select the destination media servers     Name          IP Address  Software Version  Model       E    brian 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206  O two 192 168 1 108 1 00218    Iz  three 132 158 1 103 1 0 0 218          The cloning process erases all destination server s  user content and replaces it with the  selected server s user content  Stock content is unaffected        140 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Deleting Content    To delete all User Content from a server       Delete Content    l  In the Management Client Window select  All Server in the left pane     HIGH END SYSTEMS    2  Select the Server with the content you want REI STETERIT CORDE   to delete in the right pane     3  From the drop down menu or the right click  popup list  select Delete Content  A dialog  box OKs cancels the action        DMX Summary    The DMX Summary lets you view all the content for a single server in a table format with the  following details       Whether the content is a User Media file folder  a Stock Media file folder  or a 3D Object    The associated Folder Name for media files     The Folde
147. g Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area  33  Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center  4  Mod3  direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture 5  center  Mod3  subpicture size    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center  6  Mod3 lens size    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center  7  Mod3   lens size    Cartoon Edge  Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38 NA  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity  Color DeConverge ES  3    Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down 9  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    Horizontal Mirror  Mod1   mirror center  Mod2 and  Mod3 not used    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue  RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44  intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection    Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45  makes selected intensity transparent  129 255   inverts transparency     40    43    Raindrop effect
148. gnifying lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y  lens center  Mod3   lens size    Cartoon Edge  Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast   Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity    Color DeConverge  Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    Horizontal Mirror  Mod1   mirror center  Mod2 and  Mod3 not used    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue   RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue   RGB Swap to GRB   Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero  intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection   Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128  makes selected intensity transparent  129 255  inverts transparency     Global  Effect 2    Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3  controls raindrop rate     Scale RGB  Mod1   scale red  Mod2   scale  green  Mod3   scale blue  Maximum of Mod1   Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range    Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 48 127    Mask color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    128  Edge fade color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    Mask color and Edge fade color  Mod1   red   Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Background Color  Mod1   red  Mod2   green   Mod3   blue    Background Color Cycle  Mod1   red speed   Mod2   green spe
149. he Digital Lighting support section of the High End Systems website  www highend com  support  A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal  computer  The following are recommended hardware requirements for the CMA   e Mac OS 10 4 or Windows XP with Microsoft  NET Framework 1 1 Service Pack 1  e 100 1000 base Ethernet card  a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content  uploading of large files     Note  When installing the CMA on a laptop  disable the wireless adapter to  prevent IP address conflicts that can keep the CMA from recognizing  DL 2 fixtures        DL 2 User Manual 127    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Insert the CD that shipped with your fixture to automatically install the CMA on your  harddrive     NOTE  If you are running Windows OS and the CMA doesn t automatically  install  navigate to the dl2client msi file in your windows browser and  double click to install the CMA     Upgrading CMA Softuiare to a Neuier Version   The latest fixture and CMA  client  software is always available at the High End Systems  website   www highend com support   Check the fixture s currently installed software version  under the Info tab of the fixture s menu system   see Info Version Screen on page 32  or  through the CMA s All Servers view   see Viewing Server Identification Information on page  129      To upgrade the fixture or CMA  client  software  first download the file from the website to  your computer  Then use the CMA to u
150. he filters     5  Lift the prefilter away from the filter bracket    6  Remove the two philips pan screws securing the filter bracket and lift the filter unit off the    fixture        DL 2 User Manual    151    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    7  Remove the bracket and lift the HEPA filter out of the filter housing  Inspect both the  prefilter and the HEPA filter     8  A dirty prefitler can cause an early Service Filter warning  If the prefilter looks dirty  clean it  with water  Thoroughly dry the prefilter before proceeding     9   f the HEPA filter is discolored with particulates  replace it with the part listed in Related  Products and Optional Accessories on page 3     Reassemble the Fixture  10  Reinstall the HEPA Filter with the rubber gasket    down        11  Reattach the filter bracket with the two philips pan    screws  Place HEPA  12  Replace the prefilter over the bracket on velcro 4 filter with gasket  tabs  AAEE against plenum                13  Replace the top cover  fastening it with the two  lt S    quarter turn screws  SS    14  Carefully replace the rear bezel  making sure to  position  but do not force  the gasket against the  lamp cover located on the back of the projector   and Relatch the rear bezel assembly     Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter    Internal projector air filters prevent dust from  accumulating on surface of Projection Lens and  Projection Mirror  If the projector Air Filter becomes    Filter  clogged with dust part
151. hiving User Content 1    Lei iriio Ioue SERRREEEERRRRRRRERERRIRRSESEERSRDRSESESRRRSRSEPEAEEA 138   Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline                   esses 138   Creating a Local Archives s ics deeper ead eTo e EEE a a adio e UL IA ges a RI dea UE 138  For CMA Running Windows XP            sssssssssses meme esee nnn 138  For GMA Running  Mac OS 0 4  225 atio ets cermin E dna EE rua ee e UR niet 139   Creating Content Backup Archive               sssssssssseeeeeen eene nn 139   Deploying a Gontent AFChIVQ  dr panotvi cites E EAR ERU OrDn d DEMNM OI ERU I Add G vs 139   Cloning User  COnte nt iocos unstuukxau a E MN RENE NRE RM EE   140  Deleting  Content us ous usa saxa caus Us ux NM M Ex cE Ra NNNM anne REM a a EME M M UNE 141  DMX Summary    5555 s0sosasesucsseucevuvuezeseevenecnwwndwaiwkdaaa RN RR RARO RA Ra RR RERR RR Ra RR Ra 141   Upgrading Software       oieeussnssuusuxsnusuEEEEXERRRRERERRARRRERESRASSERTRRERERRRRERRRERRRRRERERRRES 141   Verifying  Software Versions  csse teense Se URY au uY EEUU Ua aac ue fir vetdlan 141   Upgrading  the  CMA SOfEWOEG  eric erar vt Srt OST ct a E bk E HET RE eS 142   Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software              sssssssseeeeeeeen eem ee nehmen nnn 142   Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration                                eere nnne 143  Viewing Fixture Configuration Values               ssssssssssse ennemis 144  Editinig Configuration Values  oce renie unn aer sb Tad exte equi DC beans UNUM EU VN a UE actae 144    Chapt
152. icles  it will reduce the cooling Removal  fans  effectiveness and may result in an internal heat Tool  build up that can shorten projector life     Projector  Clean the projector air filter using the following steps  Filters  1  Disconnect the fixture from power    gt   L   2  Rotate and lock the fixture head in the or 90  tilt T    position  m    3  Unlatch and remove the rear bezel              4  Loosen two quarter turn screws to remove the  bottom cover and locate the filter removal tool  mounted on the chassis     SS  WS  SS  Z Y  S     C    i     N             2       152 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    5  Loosen the 2 phillips head screws to remove the tool and use it to  Loosen screws to  grasp and lift the two air filters from the internal projector  remove tool    6  Clean air filter with compresses air  a brush or wash out dust and  particles with mild soap and water     7   f the filter damaged  replace it only with the part listed in Related  Products and Optional Accessories on page 3     8  Replace completely dry filters in slot  The filters are keyed for positioning  Make sure that  both filters are fully inserted     Replacing the Lamp    WARNING   AN Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130   C     266   F   Do not attempt to hot restrike the lamp     Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes before you  open the lamp cover  The inside of the projector can become  very hot     For continued safety  rep
153. ida cub S EtrCIUM P aban em DUM DU aU  35  Determining a DMX Start Channel                sssssessesssssene ness nna 35  G DiE Vs  T6 bit DMX Parameters  ur oetea oesuxsserEnedelkrswxrs nie pole Peg uuv iymnns ce ai x Mees 35   Lighting Consoles s osse go cdcadenenenteananeedneccsadadedasddasddasedasedssesdcanucduasecuucssenuanas 36  Pauci  aBisiQ I Ic UE D um 36   Using DL 2 Servers with a WholeHog Console                                     enn 36  Addi a FIMCUY C cucnanste deu ead tds ebur ettet EUEASp tac induite ditis ea b  Re Edu oC 36  DMX OUEDUEDISDIGVS  sodas ext acca edad EE KDE E 36  LO DIEDND qM                   gues  37   Wholehog lli Programming Notes                         eeoeeseeee enn n nnne nana nnn 37  lici dro cio rrr ERE 37  Mask SODE Cis naiara  e            37  Play Modes  ODaGICY  M ER 37  eger 37  Control Channel FUunctlotis seors occu da ade eU Eea ci ort a a E aat cce ritu ds 37    Chapter 5  Graphics Engine Overview  The DL 2 fixture s graphic engine software gives you control over content  selection  playback  3 D environment you will use to select  image and project  3  D Video Lighting Content     Working in the DL 2 3 D Environment                          eeesensne enn nnnm nnn nn 39  Image Optimizing Controls          oinuis uuu uunnuenuuusanuuuuunsauunuA aa RanR Aa RES ARRER DRE ER RRRR RR 39  Graphics Control Hierarchy       252  2  52505 o o unioa Ua S RARRRRDUERRRRRR ERAS RRRRRREEERERGRSRGSERA 39  Graphic Engine FUNCTION  FIOW erreso i
154. ideo Media Files    Cleaner on Mac and Expert HD or TMPGEncoder on PC for encoding solutions offer good  quality and the most reliable DL 2 playback     Any encoder you use will need to provide options that achieve the following specifications       Size to 640x480 pixels   e All I frames  an   frame every 1 frame  for optimal tracking     Constant Bit Rate  CBR  data rates of 10 to 12 megabits sec     Closed Group of Picture  GOP    e Sequence headers each GOP  every frame      Progressive frames  since it s a progressive display device  not interlaced   e End of sequence  Sequence Style     All the encoders have demos and will batch encode  ExpertHD need a small script and a settings  file to batch encode        TMPGEncoder includes filters that let you light optimize in the encoder     Creating 3 D Objects    In general  any 3 D modeling program can be used to create objects  If the particular 3 D  modeler does not export in DirectX  x format  a translation program will be needed to translate  the object from the modeler s output format to the DirectX  x format  For example  you can use  Newtek s Lightwave 3 D   modeler to generate 3 D objects in  lwo format  and then convert the  object to  x format using Deep Exploration from Right Hemisphere     The following list includes some general notes and tips for creating a custom 3 D object       With the control parameters  position  scaling and rotation  set at their default values  a  rectangle measuring  13 0m  9 65m  Om  w
155. ight use one channel of DMX providing 256 values of  control  0 255   This is known as 8 bit DMX  Although most DL 2 parameters use 8 bit DMX   several require a more accurate range of values than can be provided with a single DMX  channel        DL 2 User Manual 35    CHAPTER 4  DMX Programming Basics    By utilizing two DMX channels for a single parameter  65535 values become available for  controlling and adjusting parameter functions  This is known as 16 bit DMX  You can adjust 16   bit DMX values in both coarse and fine increments  The first channel of the pair provides coarse  control changes of the DMX value in increments of 256  The second channel provides fine  control and changes of the DMX value in increments of 1     Lighting Consoles    Lighting consoles differ in many aspects and it is important to understand how your console  operates with DL 2 fixtures     Fixture Libraries     Many sophisticated lighting consoles utilize pre made fixture libraries  A fixture library consists  of profiles for various types of lighting fixtures and devices  Each profile corresponds to the  fixture   s DMX protocol and allows for ease of programming  Depending upon the manufacturer  of your lighting console  some DL 2 parameters might have different labels for parameter names  and functions than are listed within this manual  Consult your lighting console manual for  further information     Using DL e Servers with a WholeHog Console    Adding a Fixture    The DL 2 fixture consis
156. iguring the Video I nput Source                            c eere enean nennen nan nnn 124   Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out                                eee enne nnne nnn 125   Controlling the I nternal Camera Input                             1eeeeee eene nnn nnne 125  Camer NAI c                  m 125  camera FOCUS 2s adeb m nut tico edere aaah e MD cL TOR LOL  125  ER  URAL ON S raa ede UU RUN E Rte TN M RU o SOC OR REOR NP 125  Camera  Sh Ee nebst iM amd B a E cet liU a tcd RUD bcn E bd nd 126  White Balance Mode eate race b OL Ge OC CR SCC a ORG D DLL PCR Rd 126  One ALON pM MP hae odd T d baci dA e eR LS Ras de UXOR Grips ead adm esti t EU RE 126  Camera  EMOCS  Quei erba adorable Eee a ca vat eb t PR od ubi uta td doit 126    Chapter 14  Content Management Application   CMA   A Content Management Application  CMA  running on your workstation or  laptop computer gives you remote control of uploading and crossloading  content  upgrading software and fixture configuration for multiple DL 2 fixtures  on a fixture network     OVETVIEW  eas anna e OR TT ERAN 127  Installing the CMA  srie aiaia APAA RPR a EROPA RENEE PERSEE RAD RA PE 127  Upgrading CMA Software to a Newer Version                sess nnns 128  Auto DISCOVETY P Es 128  Fixture CONTAGION ee RETE 128  The Management Client Window                            eese eene nnne nnn nnne nnns 128  Viewing Server Identification Information                 sss emen 129  Client Window Content Organization         
157. ility     Playback Speed    The Playback Speed parameter controls the speed of the selected media file   s Playback Mode   The Playback Speed for a media file is used whenever the Playback Mode Parameter   s DMX value  is assigned to any Play Forward option     Default DMX Value  128   Playback at normal speed     A DMX value of 0 or 128  50   plays back media files at the original recorded speed  DMX  values from 1 to 127 plays the media file back at an increasing speed  from slowest to the  original recorded speed  Values from 129 255 set playback speed from faster than normal to  fastest speed        DL 2 User Manual 49    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content       50    DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 7     Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and  speed  along with it s position and scale in x  y  and z axis directions     The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define   Parameters for composite image rotation  position and global scale are described in  Chapter 10  Global Functions     Note  The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are  recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most  reliable content selection  rendering and output     Rotating a 3 D Object    The Rotation parameters for each object control 3 D object rotation with 16 bit precision   You can rotate a 3 D object up to 720  in either a clockwise or
158. ill just fill the screen       Objects are stored in Microsoft s DirectX  x format   x files may be stored in either text  form or binary form        DL 2 User Manual 221    APPENDIX C  Custom User Content    An object can have one layer  one surface and one file texture     An object s UV  texture  coordinates should be in the range  0 0 1 0  to insure proper  presentation  UV coordinates outside this range will wrap to this range but the results are  not predictable     All polygons should be triangles  when creating objects  it can be easier to work with  polygons that have more than three sides  However  an object should only contain triangles   three sided polygons  when ultimately saved for use with the graphics engine     An object can contain multiple  disconnected subobjects as long as item 4 is followed  An  example would be an object composed of an array of disconnected spheres or cubes     Managing Custom Content    The Content Management Application running on your own computer as a client to DL 2 media  servers via Ethernet manages any User Content you create  All Stock and User content can be  viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional control over other aspects of your  custom content     Sections under Managing User Content on page 133 in Chapter 14 describe the User content  management functions including instructions on how to     Rename files and folders   Delete files and folders   Control DMX value assignment to files and folders   Move
159. image   Is the mechanical iris closed  If so  check the setting for the Dimmer  parameter   see Dimmer on page 119        Did you recently change inputs  About 10 seconds are required for an input  change to take effect  However  you might have selected an invalid input  using projector controls    Try setting the projector back its defaults   see Reset Screen on page 33   Or use DMX to exit the projector menu system  see Projector Control on  page 121        Make sure a video input is physically attached to the input you selected  and  that the video feed is active     Image is blurry  out of focus      Check the Fixture filters  see page 151      or colors are unnatural    s the DL 2 mounted less than 1 4 meters to an object  If so  move the DL 2    farther away to enable it to focus properly       Make sure the DL 2 is not operating near fog machines  hazers  or mineral  oil hazers  see Fog Machine Warning on page 8        Clean the front window  see Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window  on page 154        Check the lamp  see the projector manual shipped with the DL 2        If you re using the projector s on screen programming system  you can  override zoom and focus using the menu system  see Projector Control on  page 121      The LCD Menu display is off     If the Blue LED is off  the Computer isn t receiving power  Press and hold the  Top and Bottom Tab select buttons to restart computer   see Menu Panel  Components on page 19      e If the screen is not backlit  pr
160. in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767   0   rotation around X axis     rotation around X  0   rotation around X axis     32768    vertical flip  16 gt  Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769    54 74  bit adjustment    steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151      Continuous rotation stop     rotation    Continuous rotation stop     49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around X axis  slow to fast  65535  Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around Y axis  fast to slow  Pan     Continuous rotation stop         rotation    Continuous rotation stop         16383  Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y    16384    c yo  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767  32768  50     horizontal fo     retaionaround Y axis 0   rotation around Y axis     rotation around Y axis 32768   16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769  51 74   adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151  Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around Y axis  slow to fast  65535          DL 2 User Manual 215    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol       Continuous rotation stop     rotation    Continuous rotation stop     16383    Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z  16384  26 49  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767    0   rotation around Z axis 32768   circular 16 bit   Rotates the object clockwise around Z 
161. int in space to view the composite image  and control keystone correction     Global Intensity    The Global Intensity parameter creates a  smooth fade to video black that doesn   t affect the  opacity relationship between individual objects   Use this parameter to adjust the intensity of a  composite image over the separate Graphic  Object   s Opacity parameter settings  Increase  intensity from not visible at a DMX value of 0 to  full intensity at a value of 255  100       Default DMX Value  0   no intensity  video  black        Tip  The Dimmer  Object Opacity and Global Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 2255  100    Intensity parameters all need DMX values greater Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX  255  100    than O for a defined image to be visible        Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX  255  100   Global Intensity DMX   128  50    Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX  179  70         DL 2 User Manual 79    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Global Effect Mode   and Effect Mode e    There are two Global Effect Mode parameters  each with three modifier parameters  Both  Effect Mode parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options  This lets you  apply a dual effect combination to the composite image     The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and the three  associated Modifier parameters for each option  You can find a detailed description of each  option in Chapter 11  Effect Mode Descriptions on page 93        FffeetMoe       Mode 
162. ion with object 3  10 Synchronize playback time and rotation with object 1  11 Synchronize playback time and rotation with object 2  12 Synchronize playback time and rotation with object 3  13 Synchronize playback time and reverse rotation with object 1  14 Synchronize playback time and reverse rotation with object 2  15 Synchronize playback time and reverse rotation with object 3    When using the Sync Mode parameter  keep the following in mind     e Any Sync Mode value above 15  16 255  defaults back to 0    e Every parameter that you have set to affect the Sync To object will now effect the object  you have synchronized with it     e Setting an object to sync to itself will have no effect        DL 2 User Manual 77    CHAPTER 9  Graphic Functions  Synchronizing Content    Playback Timing   Synchronizing playback sets all applicable fixtures to a master clock so that all fixtures have a  definite  synchronized starting point when playing back their sequences  or loops   The master  fixture determines the sequence length for all the other fixtures in the link  regardless of the  number of programmed scenes or the sequence length of the individual fixtures synchronizing  to the master     When the master fixture reaches the end of the selected media file segment  all fixtures will  restart at In Frame point of their media file segment  regardless of whether the playback has  come to the selected Out Frame  and all the clocks will be reset to zero  For example  if a  synchroni
163. ions    Maximum ambient temperature  Ta   35  C  95  F        224 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX D  DL 2 Specifications    Cable and Connector Specifications    Video Connectors     RGBHV   BNC x 5  e VGA   DB15  e S Video   mini DIN    Peripheral Network Connectors   e 2 USB ports    DMX and RS 485 Projector Link  Cables  Belden 9841 or equivalent  meets specifications for EIA RS 485 applications  with the    following characteristics     Common   cable shield     Two 4 conductor twisted pairs plus a shield  Maximum capacitance between conductors  30 pF ft  Maximum capacitance between conductor and shield  55 pF ft  Maximum resistance  20 Ohm 100 ft   Nominal impedance  100 140 Ohm   Grounding lug  inside XLR shell                           positive positive Comas  negative  data true   fog  cable shield    data negative neaati  gative   complement   data complement    data ena   positive complement   positive    data true   data true  Opee   Male XLR Connector Female XLR Connector     This data line is not used by the fixture  but allows data to pass through the fixture     Connectors  Two 5 pin male and female XLR connectors     Terminator  5 pin male XLR connector with a 120 Ohm terminating    Pin 1 Ground   Pin 2 Data    Pin 3 Data    Pin 4 Secondary data   Pin 5 Secondary data        resistor fitted between pins 2 and 3        DL 2 User Manual 225    APPENDIX D  DL 2 Specifications       226 DL 2 User Manual    Appendix         Safety Information    Warning  For Continued
164. it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold     Background Color C Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   131    There is a background behind every composite image  You cannot rotate  scale or position the  background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position  This option allows you to apply  color to the background     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0   no red to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0   no green to 255   10096    maximum green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0   no blue to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Background Color Cycle   1Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   132  There is a background behind every composite image  You cannot rotate  scale or position the    background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position  This option allows you to cycle a  color sequence on the background controlling the transition speed     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component speed  A DMX value of 128  5096    default cycle  speed  DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255   100     fastest change speed  DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a  backward direction to 0   fastest change speed     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component speed in the same way 
165. ixture head  Pressing Reset reverts  pea Ret all settings to the current fixture head temperature    Software Version    Firmware Version   Displays currently installed versions  Pan Encoder Version   Tilt Encoder Version    Unique ID Displays Internal ID  IP Address Displays fixture s IP address  Displays a currently assigned Fixture Name    L H  Monitors lamp  fixture  and filter hours of operation   Fixture Reset    Selecting Reset reverts hours to 0   Hours  Motion Shutdown Displ i   d F  Projector Status   isp ays system activity and errors  For more  Status rate information  see Chapter 15  Maintenance and  Troubleshooting on page 149     Projector Air Filter  Motion All Resets all mechanical functions to default positions    Motion Pan   Tilt    Motion Iris   Zoom     Version    Resets Pan and Tilt functions to default positions    Resets mechanical functions for Iris  Zoom  and  Focus to default positions  Focus    Self Test  On Selecting On starts a test sequence for Pan and Tilt  Pan Tilt mechanical functionality  eee On    Selecting On starts a test sequence for Iris  mechanical functionality  m Self Test  On  Selecting On starts a test sequence for Zoom  Zoom mechanical functionality  Self Test  On  Selecting On starts a test sequence for Focus  Focus mechanical functionality    Selecting a Video Pattern and On displays a sample    Selecting Upgrade installs updates to factory  APAE etel omen content  requires connection to the CMA     Video  Test          24 DL 2
166. jector will accept  Input Internal  Projector In   Yes Selecting Yes allows projector   s input source to be  by DMX selected from DMX  d Disables changing projector input via DMX  Projector NK Manually turns Projector Lamp on  Lamp Of  Manually turns Projector Lamp off  Mwave ELT the projector lamp on whenever the fixture is  d connected to power  A cad Turns on the projector lamp when Projector Lamp    Mode  Projector    Turns the projector lamp on with DMX  input  default   Projector  On     Navigation buttons control Projector Menu System  OSD Menu Navigation buttons control Fixture Menu System  Zoom On  On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console     Override Set value manually from 0 255  Focus On  On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console   Override Set value manually from 0 255    Projector Defaults Selecting button restores Factory Projector Defaults    Projector  On  Rotates the image 180 degrees    Ceiling Default    Inverts the image for projection from behind a  Projector  screen  Rear    Settings do not match factory defaults    File Displays content file locations and allows a content  preview  see page 33      DL 2 User Manual 23          CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Main  T Fiel     Tab  Screens Controls OPtions   Function  Notes  Displays fixture base housing s current  minimum  Box Reset and maximum temperature  Pressing Reset reverts  all settings to the current temperature  Displays current  minimum and maximum  Head Reset temperature of f
167. king in the road case and secure Lock  with the pan lock located on the yoke base     Note  This is the only pan position that locks     2  Move the tilt lock peg to the upper left  locked     position          3  3  Gently move the projector head and yoke to   verify that both pan and tilt positions are locked         YR   in place  ME m    CT  J        DL 2 User Manual 17    CHAPTER 2    Setup and Configuration    lace Top over the fixture first    L gt     fixture in its  provided road  case for    4  Place the DL 2  shipping           2  Bring sides of case together and latch       DL 2 User Manual    18    Chapter 3   The DL 2 Menu System    You can use the DL 2 fixture   s Menu System to configure the fixture   review diagnostic feedback  and view content information     The DL 2 fixture use a 5    LCD screen to display the onboard menu system  Navigation and select  buttons let you move to different tab levels and options displayed on the Menu screen     Note  You can also access most Menu options through the CMA  see Chapter 14   Content Management Application  CMA  on page 127   Certain options can also  be controlled remotely via a DMX console s Control channel  see Control  Function Options on page 120      Menu Panel Components             5 System Tab Select Buttons Menu Display    State LEDs Menu Tabs Adjustments  po  y H P     F f aD   Source o      e   17 pmsi2_ i o   g   Protocol Start O   CJ uL Standard J Channel O   CJ      PituelD         ZHGHeNpsvsrevs CO
168. lace with a lamp assembly of the  same type     Do not drop the lamp module or touch the glass bulb  The glass  can shatter and cause injury       Shut down the fixture and disconnect from power     Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes       Unlatch and remove the back bezel     BR WN e      Loosen the two phillips head screws and open the  lamp cover        5  Loosen the two phillips head screws  grasping the  handle and pull out the lamp assembly     Lamp cover  screws    6  Replace the lamp assembly  see Related Products    Lamp Assembly  and Optional Accessories on page 3     handle    7  Seat the assembly and tighten the two lamp  assembly screws        8  Close the lamp cover and tighten the two lap cover  SCrews     9  Reconnect to power                                                           Lamp assembly screws       DL 2 User Manual 153    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Replacing the Fuse    WARNINGS   AN Disconnect power before servicing     Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only     130   C  266   F   Allow the fixture to cool before    f Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to  handling     The DL 2 has one user serviceable fuse which controls mains voltage to the fixture     To replace a fuse     l  Disconnect power to the fixture  If the  fixture has been operating  allow the fixture  to cool before handling     2  Loosen the 2 Phillips head screws on the top  cover of the connector side of the box     3  
169. limit to the Ethernet cable run length from the fixtures to the CMA   Ethernet Cat 5 limit is 100 meters  For longer distances use a router that takes fiber input to  Cat 5 output as for typical Ethernet distribution    What is the longest length High End Systems has tested for camera video  distribution     High End has tested up to 1000 feet of quality Cat 5 without noticing degradation of signal     Does DL 2 support the file format  MPEG 4      MPEG 4 is not currently supported  Convert original graphics and video to MPEG 2        162 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter l6   Restoring the System    There are two types of system restore that you can perform on the DL 2 with your  DL 2 System Restore CD  a    full    system restore or a    partial    system restore     A Full System restore should only be done in the event of complete drive failure     Caution  Contact High End Systems Support   http     www highend com  PRI OR to    initiating a Full Restore     A partial restore can be done to replace the O S partition of the drive  but should only be  done as part of a specified upgrade plan  In that case  the XPe image the fixture shipped with  will need to be updated     All system restore operations require the DL 2 System Restore CD that ships with each DL 2  fixture  If you have misplaced or damaged this CD  you may contact High End Systems   http   www highend com  for a replacement     For a full system restore  you will also need      External USB DVD drive     USB keybo
170. ll fixture to displ Select ti  Collage Generator allows a fixture to display a elects portion mulusts Edge    Selects A  134   portion of the output to create multi fixture j E i e i of image to blendin  panorama displays  yP display g    iN  N    ES  128       These options are listed alphabetically with additional detail in Chapter 11  Effect Mode Options  Descriptions on page 91        82 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Masking Control    Mask Shape Select and Strobing    The Mask Select parameter lets you  choose a mask to frame or overlay a  composite image  You can choose to  apply a mask to an image when you    don t want an entire image to be seen   0   128   Round    iris    mask closing from outside in    Or you want to transition from an L5 1 3291 Round Iris closing from inside out    image to black or a solid color Rectangle closing from outside in  without fading intensity  Rectangle closing from inside out    4 Checkerboard  variation 1  Mask Shapes Checkerboard  variation 2    ee  The DL 2 graphics engine currently 1a       M  provides 30 mask shapes including   7   135  Radial wipe  variaion2    circular  rectangular  and oval masks   8   136 Radial wipe  variation3    that close from inside out or outside   9   137  Radial wipe  variation 4      in  Checker Board  Radial Wipes  and  Multi  panel options are also included  with several variations   Default DMX Value  0   Round   iris  mask closing from outside in   inicibu bu t diad  reserv
171. lobal   1 object   94 channels  Fixture ID   1 255 Assigns the fixture a unique number on fixture  network    alari 1 512 Sets the fixture   s DMX start channel   Channel   Main Table Displays DMX values for all 512 DMX link channels  in rows of values     Scrolls through rows of DMX values    Raw View d Times second for refreshing displayed values    Refresh  On   DMX values updated instantly    Timer Off     Display does not refresh    Displays fixture Movement and Camera parameter  Motion  values    Displays Intensity  Iris  Edge Fade  Viewpoint and  Protocol   Global Keystone correction parameters values for the  View composite image    pu values for the selected graphic object    Panien Wooo Inverts the direction of the pan motor   Ta E  Of Deet SSS  Pan Tilt On  Swaps Pan and Tilt directions  in  Data Loss Closes iris after a 5 minute DMX data loss  Fixture Timeout Iris Closes i iris after a 5 second DMX data loss  or admet Note  Unless you select Off  E  aS PEGN you can adjust display  Display intensity level  i  content preview  OF Tums off displey afier a period oftime    Displa On J     Inverts menu display and navigation  dua d Turns off the display invert  Automatically inverts display  gt 45            22 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    Main Sub Tabs  Fields    Fixture E ea E Identifies the SVideo format used for video input   SVideo    Factory On  Restores factory default settings  Defaults Default  j Ext    neces Chooses the input the Pro
172. lobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   10    This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color above a set  threshold  Solarize options can create strong highlights     Modifier 1   ncreases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation  Red color values above the threshold are converted to cyan     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation  Blue color values above the threshold are converted to magenta     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation  Green color values above the threshold are converted to yellow     Solarize 3 M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   11    This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and eliminates the color below a set  threshold  Solarize options can create strong highlights     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation  Red color values below the threshold are eliminated     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation  Blue color values below the threshold are eliminated     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation  Green color values below the threshold are eliminated     Solarize 4 M Object Effect MGlobal Eff
173. lues become blue and all blue values become  green  Red values are unaffected     Modifier 1  No change to red color component    Modifier 2  Transitions green color component to blue from 0   no color change to  255  100     blue    Modifier 3  Transitions blue color component to green from 0   no color change to  255  10096    red    Scan Line M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   32    Maps image color intensities to the colors in a single horizontal line of the selected texture   Modifier 1  Selects a line of the media file to scan   Modifier 2  Adjusts the mapping transition   Modifier 3  Not used    Solarize   M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   9    This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color below a set  threshold  Solarize options can create strong highlights     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation  Red color values below the threshold are converted to cyan     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation  Blue color values below the threshold are converted to magenta     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation  Green color values below the threshold are converted to yellow        DL 2 User Manual 103    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Solarize 2 M Object Effect MG
174. lugged in    Projector Startup Mode Manual turns lamp on only if the Lamp is set to On  DMX turns lamp on if DMX is present    Projector Zoom Value  Upgrade Content Press Upgrade to upgrade stock content  Restore Settings Press Restore to revert to factory fixture settings    On tests focus mechanical functionality  Self Test Focus  Off stops self test  Self Test Iris On tests Iris mechanical functionality  Off stops self test  Self Test Pan Tilt On tests Pan and Tilt mechanical functionality  Off stops self test  Self Test Video Pattern Select from a list of Patterns to test graphics engine  functionality    Self Test Zoom On tests Zoom mechanical functionality  Off stops self test    Press Reboot to restart the internal graphics engine  Software Version Read only    NTSC M NTSC_M PAL B PAL D  PAL G PAL H PAL I PAL M  External SVideo Format PAL N SECAM B SECAM D SECAM G       SECAM_H SECAMK  SECAM K1 SECAM L  SECAM L1      On Inverts Tilt positioning  Tilt Invert    Off reverts to default position    Unique Number Read only          DL 2 User Manual 147    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA        148 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter I5     Maintenance and Troubleshooting    This chapter includes information on replacing parts  cleaning the fixture  and  some basic troubleshooting procedures     The following toolset should be all you need for the maintenance procedures in this chapter       M3 allen wrench   e M4 allen wrench   e  2 Phillips screwdriver    Gloves   
175. ment Application  CMA     Managing User Content    All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional  control over other aspects of your custom content  Within the CMA window   you can     e Rename user files and folders  e Delete files and folders    Control DMX value assignment to files and folders    e Move files and folders between your local drive and a DL 2 fixture server     Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders   You can Rename any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window  using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection  Use  the standard Windows operating system naming conventions     You can Delete any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window  using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection     Note  You cannot Delete a movie if the DL 2 server is playing it     Assigning DMX Values to User Content  The DMX Value associated with each file and folder makes it easy to use the DMX control  protocol to identify a unique media file or 3D object     There are up to 240 Media file folders with each capable of containing up to 255 image or  movie media files  This gives a theoretical total of 61 200 possible locations for Media image or  movie files  There is one DMX parameter used to identify a 3D object so 255 DMX values are  available between the Stock and User Content to iden
176. mperature  Fail Error    Projector Temperature PROJ TEMP WARN Projector is over recommended  Warning operating temperature  The PC failed to initialize USB  communication with the box    USB port  Communication Error    Filter needs Servicing  Replace    FILTER SERVICE WARN    The Lamp has exceeded it   s    LAMP LIFE ERROR rated life and must be replaced    PROJ COMM ERROR    Projector temperature has    PROJ TEMP ERROR exceeded operational range and    USB INIT ERROR    See Cleaning and  Replacing Filters on  page 150    See Cleaning and  Replacing Filters on  page 150    See Replacing the  Lamp on page 153     Check the Comm  cable connections at  serial port on the back  of projector and at the  fixture head card     Make sure lamp is  struck    Cool fixture and then  restrike the lamp    Contact High End  Systems Customer    i Support  USB port Security Error   USB SECURE ERROR Hab taled O Dass We PATAWA PP  security test           DL 2 User Manual    159    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    System State LEDs    Five labeled LEDs on the display panel indicate the following system activity     Name   Color   Swe J  Deswp  on                      Projector   White On   Projector lamp is on  Y         Pais lamp is off  Breo rem lamp is either cooling down or in a indeterminate state  Status Green  45 sec On 1 4 sec Off  Running normal motion control code    PME Board communication activity  for example  during a software upload  Blinking Lo 320 processor card i
177. n Out Frame as an end point     Note  DMX parameter values for these parameters do not correspond to a  particular  frame   They are defined as a percentage of the movie length   This makes it possible to create segments with an Out Frame preceding  the In Frame and simplifies playback synchronization between media files     The I n Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to a starting point for the  playback segment of the selected file  The Out Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX  value equal to an end point for the playback segment of the selected media file     Assigning the In Frame and Out Frame parameters to default DMX values will playback the  entire movie file  Choosing other settings are useful when you want to       begin or end a media file at any point other than the default    Start or stop on a specific image      you need to shorten the media file to a specific length       DL 2 User Manual 47    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    In Frame Default DMX Value  0   The beginning of a media file is the playback start point   Out Frame Default DMX Value  65535   The end of a media file is the playback endpoint     As you move from 0 to 100  of the In Frame value range  you can select the beginning of a  media file segment as a percentage of the file length  Moving from 0 to 100  of the Out Frame  value range selects the end of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length     Segment Selection Examples Example 1  In
178. n and Tilt Locking    The DL 2 fixture ships with pan and tilt latches locked  You can unlock adjust these latches to  stabilize the fixture for mounting          Tilt Lock    NS                            Pan Lock                                     CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Attaching a Power Cord Cap    The DL 2 fixture ships with an SJT power cord  Use the information in this section to replace the  power cord cap for locations with another electrical standard     Different locations  even within the same country  may require a different power cord cap to  connect the fixture to a power outlet  Because of the variety of power cord caps used  worldwide  High End Systems  Inc  cannot make specific recommendations for the power cord  cap  Contact a local authority for the type of power cord cap needed  When installing the power  cord cap  note that the cores in the mains lead are colored according to the following code       green and yellow   earth    blue   neutral  e brown   live    Installing a Line Cord Cap   U K  Only   In the United Kingdom  the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not  correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in the fixture s plug  Therefore   install a line cord cap in accordance with the following code       The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the plug terminal which  is marked with the letter  E   or by the earth symbol QD  or coloured green  or green and  yellow
179. n from no adjustment at a DMX value   0 to full  saturation at a value of 255  100         ssl  ad    aif Fi adi     Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   2  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   2 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100         Visual Mode Parameter DMX value  2  Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75    Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 7 255  100         66 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Push to Red  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   3  This option reduces colors in the selected image to all Red values    Modifier 1  Fades from original color at a DMX value   0 to a range of red tones at a value of  255  100      Modifier 2  Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value   0 to full  saturation at a value of 255  100         P       a  adi    pa a 2   i  Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   3  Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   3 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100         Visual Mode Modifier1 DMX value 190 75    Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100         DL 2 User Manual 67    CHAPTER 8   Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects  Gray maker     Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   4    This effect gradually transitions the color image to a grayscale image  Use the Gray Maker  effect when you want to add an undertone of grey to the colors in an image     NOTE  If content is already grayscale  there is no effect applied but  Modifier 2 can still effect image contrast     Modifier 
180. n the base housing is receiving code     Drive   Amber   Blinking Hard drive activity  Steady Internal computer is receiving power  Power Red   Steady Fixture s Motion Control system is receiving power    Board L   D States    LEDs located on DL 2 fixture boards indicate how the unit is functioning  The following Table  lists LED States  and problems they may indicate     tocsin  LEDA     Sii  Probem                  Desoilion                    ELE MM            Fitur Yes  Henc    Siow Flashing Green   No Runing system code  normal opera  on  T    e Sen e mda O  pos Of Maybe   No ONX sondorreosved      Housing 102  Gem  No Receiving NX  Card Red    Maybe   Transmitting DMX   os   Sear Ne Nets Spon NN    General Troubleshooting Suggestions  The following table shows general troubleshooting suggestions     Problem                          Sowo                    Won t power on   Check the fuse  page 154              Verify fixture is plugged in to an appropriately rated power source  power  ratings are shown on page 224        Check power cord wiring  page page 224      During certain movements    f you have loosened or tightened anything in the pan and tilt assemblies  the  the fixture motion slows  stepper motors may be out of alignment  Recalibrate pan and tilt motors by  missteps or loses position selecting Calibrate Motors button in the Test Home menu screen           160 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    Problem   SBT    Powers on but no 
181. n where  you saved a copy of latest version     5  After locating the upgrade file  press Next  The Upgrade Wizard displays a list of all  servers connected to the fixture network        142 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     6  Click in the box to the left of the server name to select a server s  for upgrading     Upgrade Wizard    HIGH END SYSTEMS       Chose Ihe servers to upgrade        Address   Software Version  10 103   10 10 10 102   10 10 10 107   10 10 10 104   10 10 10 105   10 10 10 106    Selec  All   Clear All    c Back   Next      Cancel      7  Click Next to continue upgrade  The DL 2 will reboot after the upgrading the software                Mac OS X  Upgrading Software    To upgrade multiple servers  select multiple fixtures from the All Servers  list        Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration    The CMA lets you remotely view and modify fixture settings     Some settings like Lamp Hours  CPU Temperature  Software Versions  etc  are view only  Other  settings such as Fixture ID  various Projector settings  DMX Start Channel  etc  can be  modified  configured      All of these settings are available for each fixture through the fixture menu system  see  Chapter 3  The DL 2 Menu System on page 19  The CMA has some additional configuration  features that let you     e Assign a name to servers connected over the network for easier identification of servers on  your network       Compare all the Configuration Items of a
182. nd Object 2 Object 2 Z Scale parameter DMX value   223  All Scale parameters DMX values   128  50   Scaled 7 5 times in Z direction       58 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Changing Object Position    You can reposition each 3 D object   s position in 3 D space by moving it along the X  Y and Z  axes  The following parameters act on an individual object  Use these parameters to position  3 D images in relation to each other     X Position  The X Position parameter moves your object along the x axis with 16 bit precision     The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the X axis  Values below  the DMX midpoint move the object left  and values above the DMX midpoint move the object  right     Default DMX Value  32768  50     object centered in frame       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1  X Position DMX value   32022  All Position DMX values   32768  50         Object 1  X Position DMX value   33561       DL 2 User Manual 59    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Y Position  The Y Position parameter moves your object along the y axis with 16 bit precision     The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range  centers the image on the Y axis  Values below  the DMX midpoint move the object down  and values above the DMX midpoint move the  object up     Default DMX Value  32768  50     object centered in frame       m y 1  T       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1  Y Position DMX value 
183. nent from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata  value of 255  100      Modifier 2  Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta at  a value of 255  100      Modifier 3  Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow ata  value of 255  100      RGB Invert and Swap to BRG M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   19  This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted BRG color model     Modifier 1  Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow ata  value of 255  100      Modifier 2  Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata  value of 255  100      Modifier 3  Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta ata  value of 255  100         100 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    RGB Invert and Swap to GBR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   18  This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted GBR color model     Modifier 1  Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta ata  value of 255  100      Modifier 2  Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow at a  value of 255  10096     Modifier 3  Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan at a  value of 255  10096     RGB Scale M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter D
184. newave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation   Effect Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset   Io Mode 1  id Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation   Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect O 75 255    449 Effect Mode 1 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no   0 255   4 499  Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Effect Mode 1   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect  0 255   1 100  Effect Mode 1   Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers          DL 2 User Manual 211    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Off  no effects selection I  CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values   Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   RGB Add 2 All Pi
185. nfirm  and the restore will  begin     Click    Confirm    to begin a Full System  Restore    Confirm mene  x       7  Allow the restore to run  This will take between 10 30 minutes depending on the speed of  your USB drive  Status will be displayed throughout the restore     Starting Full System Restore       cx CAWINDOWS system32 cmd exe    Microsoft DiskPart version 5 1 3565    Copyright  lt C gt  1999 2663 Microsoft Corporation   On computer  IMAGE BUILDER    wat O08 Uu M  m    E    sor m us u  I   m    a Ea cm m   mm  Partitioning hard drive          8  When this part of the restore is completed  the DL 2 will automatically restart        166 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 16  Restoring the System    9  Allow the device a few minutes to perform some OS initialization and reboot once more     The following steps are additional steps for a full system restore only     10  If you are performing a full system restore  you now need to re load the DL 2 Stock  content  Remove your    DL 2 System Restore CD    and insert the first    DL 2 Stock content  DVD        11  Navigate in the DL 2 menu to the Rst tab  Select the  Upgrade Content    button  You will see  the filenames scroll by as the content is copied to the fixture  Wait until you see the     Upgrade Successful    message     12  Repeat steps 9 10 for each additional Stock content DVD     13  Once the upgrade is complete  you may remove all your external USB devices     Error     The script has received the error code  5  
186. ns over a portion of the image  You can adjust the size of the lens and move it  over different areas of the image     Modifier 1  Controls the horizontal position of the lens    centerpoint from O left edge to 255   100     right edge of output     Modifier 2  Controls the vertical position of the lens    centerpoint from O top edge to 255   10096    bottom edge of output     Modifier 3  Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255  100     largest     Tip  Zooming in with this lens option creates an additional effect        DL 2 User Manual 109    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Picture in Picture M Object Effect Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   35    This options creates a window in the image containing a scaled down version of the same image  and then lets you position it anywhere on the output plane     Modifier 1  Controls the horizontal position of the subpicture   s centerpoint from O left edge to  255  100     right edge of output     Modifier 2  Controls the vertical position of the subpicture   s centerpoint from O top edge to  255  100     bottom edge of output     Modifier 3  Controls the size of the picture from O smallest to 255  100     largest     Pixel Twist M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   34    This option introduces a twisted area to the image and allows to you size it and move it in the  image    Modifier 1  Controls the horizontal position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O l
187. nt  When viewing Content  the right pane contains the following information in a table format     r     HighEnd DL  Management Client  File Media Files Help    HIGH END SYSTEMS      E  ry All Servers  4 servers        He B two  2   E  000 Amorphous Long Trailer  mv2 m     mzv 1 38928KB 2 2 2005 7 5     User Content  7  001 Blue 70s  mv2 m2v mov 2 13033KB 2 2 2005 6 0   O Amorphous_Digi_gobos  40   7  002 Bright Psych mv2 m2v m2v 3 2Q31EKB 2 2 2005 8 0     E ce  7 003 Max Psych  mv2 m2v m 4 EJBDKB 2 2 2006 8 0   Bl    A re m  5  004 Ripple Melt 3 mv2 m2v mov 5 8J46KB 2 2 2005 6 0   G Bie  44  E  005 Square Hypno myve  mew mav B 1B523kB 2 2 2005 8 0        Note  Clicking on a column heading sorts the table according to the values  in that column        DL 2 User Manual 131    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Viewing Folders  Each Stock or User Media folder contains a group of media files       Name of the Media File collection  This value is editable for User content  See Naming and  Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 133     e DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder  This value can be auto assigned  and edited for User content  See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on  page 133       File Count of files in this collection    Date the folder was last modified  Vieuiing Files  Selecting the actual media folder reveals its contents     Name of the file  This value is editable for User content  See Naming and Deleting
188. nual    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Mask Edge Fade    The Mask Edge Fade parameter diffuses the edge of your chosen mask   Default DMX Value  0   no edge fade applied to mask  Adjust the amount of edge fade from 1   no edge fade to 255   maximum edge fade     When a Mask Select parameter value of    Note  A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask Edge Fade  color on page 98        Original Image       Mask applied without Edge Fade Mask with Edge Fade applied       DL 2 User Manual 85    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Image Edge Fade   Four Image Edge Fade parameters let you control the Edge Fade for individual sides of your  object  top  bottom  left and right   When projecting abutting images  adjusting the Edge Fade  parameter lets you smooth the line between two images and also allows you to change an  object   s boundary     Default DMX Value  0   all edges are sharp and hard     Adjust each side separately for edge fade from 0   no fade to 255  100     opaque                         100  Top Edge Fade       O    100  Left Edge Fade      10095 Top  Bottom  Left  Right Edge Fade       86 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Keystone Correction Parameters    When an image is output from a  DL 2 fixture at an angle the image  may appear skewed  Eight  Keystone parameters adjust the  image shape and compensate for  this effect  You can control each of  the four corners of the graphics  output to reshape your image to a  form that projec
189. o change to the Play Modes that trigger when Opacity is greater than zero  To restore  to normal triggering  select    Media Trigger Normal        CMY    The Global and Graphic fixture types both contain CMY controls for the Effect Mode modifier  channels  The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well  For some effect options  the CMY  parameters will not adjust color  but will adjust the effect per the DL 2 DMX protocol  You can  find a description of CMY controls functionality for each effect option in Chapter 11  Effect Mode  Options Descriptions on page 91     Control Channel Functions    Many of the control channel functions in the motion    fixture    only operate if the dimmer changes  from  gt 0 to 0 at the same time or just after a change is made to the control channel  See the  DL2 protocol for specific information        DL 2 User Manual 37    CHAPTER 4  DMX Programming Basics       38 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 5     Graphics Engine Overview    The DL 2 fixture   s graphic engine software gives you control over content  selection  playback  3 D environment you will use to select  image and project 3 D  Video Lighting Content     Working in the DL 2 3 D Environment    DL 2 fixtures provide individual and composite graphical control for up to three 3 D Objects  You  can control the    footprint    of the fixture on a DMX link by choosing to implement only the  number of 3 D objects your application requires  Select the protocol level in the fixture   s  onbo
190. o maximum  Effect Mode 1   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect  0 255   1 100  Effect Mode 1   Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers          DL 2 User Manual 199    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Off  no effects selection I  CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   reduces color values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values   Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3   yellow  CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color  values    Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  RGB Add All Pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   RGB Add 2 All Pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   RGB Add  non black pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    RGB Swap to BGR   Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue    Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize 2  if color value  gt  DMX  invert color   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize  if color value  lt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling     Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue     All or Nothing  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  M
191. obbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    48          190 DL 2User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sede   Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3 blue         16 es Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3  blue E  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect 0 15 255    ieee Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no  0255 1 100  0  o   Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Effect Mode 2   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  ET          adjustment depends on the effect   0255   1 100  0   0  L3        Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers  0255   1 100  0   0  Modifier 3 may not be used         Graphic 1 Rotation    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around X axis  fast to slow  mm  32768  50       Continuous rotationstop         rotation    Continuous rotationstop         16383   X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X  16384  26 49  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767   0   rotation around X axis     rotation around X  0   rotation around X axis     32768    vertical flip  165
192. object component of an image  Object files  are the 3 D object shapes used to build a total image  The DL 2 graphics engine supports a  combined total of 255 stock and user created object files     Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited  DMX values 1 149 are reserved for  identifying stock object files  User created object files must be assigned a unique DMX value  from 150 255     For a reference of 3 D object files available as stock content with your DL 2 fixture and  information on how to create your own object files  go to the link for the Stock Object Guide on  http     www highend com rt  digital lightin l2 rtgui       Default DMX Value  1   full screen flat surface    TIP  You can select the same object file for images that will be interacting with  each other  If both objects occupy exactly the same area in 3 D space    Z fighting   a shimmering effect  on some portions of the composite image  can occur as the graphics engine tries to determine which object should be  in the foreground     You can avoid this effect by making a slight adjustment to one of the  object s scale or moving it forward or back  using the Z Position parameter   in respect to the other        44 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    Media Folder    This parameter defines a folder  directory  containing a collection of media files  The media files    within the assigned folder can then be selected using the Media File parameter  Media Folder   
193. od3  blue     Solid Color RGB   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   RGB Invert   Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR  Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG  Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green          200 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Edge Detect Color  Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Texture Ripple  Horizontal  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Vertical  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using                 ll ll         NO NO    N    Q2 oO OO N N N N N N  N O  i91  gt  C2 NO   co Co N O  C1  gt  N         Effect Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  114  Mode 2 isl Cid Inverse  Sum  Select eh color  Chromakey  ors Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red
194. odifier parameters adjust the selected mode     Note  In most cases  you won t see a change in the content until the  Modifier parameters for that mode are adjusted     Default DMX Value  0   Safe  no processing applied   Modifier 1 Default DMX Value  0   Full Brightness    Modifier 2 Default DMX Value  0   No Contrast adjustment    The table below illustrates the interaction between the Visual Mode Parameter and the two  associated Modifier parameters for each option     DMX ane  value Name   Definition    Modifer     Modfer2      Safe No visual mode processing applied to Not Used Not Used  rendered output   1 Content Enhances image black level and Adjusts Adjusts Contrast  Optimization   contrast Back Level  Push to   Fades from original image color to j  Sepia sepia Saturation  I  from original image color to red Adjusts  3  Push to Red Adjusts Fade  Saturation  Gradually transitions image from color   Replaces color   Adjusts brightness  Graymaker  to grayscale with gray of grayscale image  Graymaker2   Converts image to grayscale maus graS CAO mas gocce  image black level   image contrast    Posterizor Converts colors to their highest values   Reduces color Adjusts Contrast  Posee   Cones bleeding or blending detail    Maps original color intensity levels to a ranes ongina   Fire Gradient l image to red  Not Used  red to yellow gradient  l  yellow gradient      Subtract red to  Negative Art  Reverses image color Scales color Subtract Green  10 E pote Alternate content op
195. of Red  Green and Blue values  The Inverse  Chromakey Fine parameter selects a color range  15  either side of the defined value and then  sets every other color as a chromakey     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from 0   no red to 255  10096    maximum red  saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from 0   no green to 255  10096    maximum  green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from 0   no blue to 255  100     maximum  blue saturation     Chromakey Medium M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   27    A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another   behind  it  The removed color becomes transparent  The modifier parameters define the color  you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red  Green and Blue values  The Chromakey  Medium parameter selects a color range  25  either side of the defined value     Modifier 1  Defines the red color component from 0   no red to 255  10096    maximum red  saturation     Modifier 2  Defines the green color component from 0   no green to 255  100     maximum  green saturation     Modifier 3  Defines the blue color component from 0   no blue to 255  100     maximum  blue saturation     Chromakey Medium  Inverse M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   30    A chromakey removes a color  or small color range  from one graphic image to reveal another     behind    it  The removed color 
196. of the range compress the image horizontally from  maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128  DMX value settings  above the midpoint of the range expand the image horizontally from no expansion at a value of    128 to maximum expansion at a value of 255        Original media file X Ratio DMX value   255  100      Y Ratio    The Y Ratio parameter shapes the output to  adjust for keystone effects created in certain  output situations  This parameter adjusts the  output by compressing or expanding the image  vertically     Default DMX Value  128  50   2 no  adjustment    DMX value settings below the midpoint of the  range compress the image vertically from       maximum compression at a value of 0 to no    compression at a value of 128     _ 7  DMX value settings above the midpoint of the Y Ratio DMX value   255  100      range expands the image vertically from no expansion at a value of 128 to maximum expansion  at a value of 255        88 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    Global Viewpoint Mode    The Global Viewpoint Mode parameter defines a 3 D space and the Viewpoint Position  parameters modify your viewing location with the defined 3  D space  Each Viewpoint Mode uses  three values to specify a viewpoint in space  This point in space is specified by the horizontal  angle  vertical angle  and zoom     Within any 3 D space  you can choose the viewpoint target as     e Center of 3 D space    Center of Object 1    Center of Object
197. olor DeConverge   Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down 39  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB 43  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44    intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection   Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45    makes selected intensity transparent  129 255  inverts transparency   Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3  controls raindrop rate   Effect  76 Mode 2 Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and 47  Mod3 sets overall color range E  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2    Mod1 7x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used     Reserved  Defaults to effect O 49 63    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset  Sinewave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation    Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3  offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis W
198. olor component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation     RGB Adde  AII Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   5  This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  10096    maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation        DL 2 User Manual 99    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    RGB Add to Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   6  This option adds color to all pixels except black using the RGB color model     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation     RGB Invert M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   17    This option inverts color values to transition the image from an RGB to a CMY color model     Modifier 1  Transitions the red compo
199. only        150 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 15  Maintenance and Troubleshooting    2 9 Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130  C  ai  266   F   Allow the fixture to cool before handling     CAUTI ON      gt     projection quality     Do not operate a projector with Air Filter removed  Dust may  accumulate on LCD Panel and Projection Mirror degrading    Do not put small parts into Air I ntake Vents  It may result in  malfunction of a projector     Cleaning the Base Housing Filter  This filter is located between the   handles on the fan side of the   box  You can pull it off the fixture   and clean it with soap and water    Allow it to dry thoroughly before  Pre filter  replacing     Replacing the Fixture Filter  A hepa filter and a prefilter are  located inside the fixture head  and should be replaced when   ever they become discolored  from particulates or when the  Menu displays FILTER Service  ERROR or FILTER Service  WARN    Tilt lock    Access the fixture filters    1  Lock the fixture head in the  70  tilt position    2  Unlatch and remove the rear  bezel assembly     3  Loosen the two quarter turn  screws on the top cover and  remove the top cover                       Top cover    Loosen  Quarter   turn screws  to remove  top cover    Filter bracket  Filter    Remove  philips screws  and lift filter  bracket    Rear Bezel    Open Latches  to remove  bezel    from fixture to clean    4  Slide the top cover back to  free it from the front bezel     Inspect t
200. orizontally to the largest at 255  100       Default DMX Value  128  50     Normal Scale       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 X Scale DMX value   165  All Scale DMX values   128  50   Scaled 3 times in X direction       56 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Y Scale    The Y Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the y axis  either expanding it or  making it smaller  Use it when you want to size the object s vertical component     A DMX value of 128  5096  sets the object at its normal size  Values less than 5096 shrink the  object vertically to the smallest at O  Values greater then 5096 enlarge the object vertically to  the largest at 255  10096      Default DMX Value  128  50     Normal Scale       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Y Scale parameter DMX value   165  All Scale parameters DMX values   128  50   Scaled 3 times in Y direction       DL 2 User Manual 57    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Z Scale    The Z Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the z axis  either expanding or  Shrinking it  Use it when you want to size the object   s thickness     A DMX value of 128  50   sets the object at its normal size  Values less than 50  shrink the  the object thickness until it reaches a point at a value of 0  Values greater then 50  enlarge  the object to a maximum thickness at 255  100       Default DMX Value  128  50     Normal Scale       Original Object 1 a
201. oves green down 9  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    Horizontal Mirror  Mod1   mirror center  Mod2 and  Mod3 not used    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue  RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44  intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection    Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45  makes selected intensity transparent  129 255   inverts transparency     40    43    Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3 46  controls raindrop rate           186 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and  Mod3 sets overall color range  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2  Mod1  x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used   Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 49 63  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation   79 Effect Mod1 siz
202. ovides the ability to convert the camera   s image to black and white  B amp W   or  invert the color  Negative art   A snapshot can also be taken of the camera   s image  Freeze  Frame  with or without one of these effects applied        126 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter l4   Content Management Application  CMA     A Content Management Application  CMA  running on your workstation or laptop  computer gives you remote control of uploading and crossloading content   upgrading software and fixture configuration for multiple DL 2 fixtures on a  fixture network     Overvieui     Before you launch the CMA  set up your Ethernet network and link all DL 2 fixtures you want  to access from the CMA  See Linking DL 2 Fixtures on page 10 for more information on  configuring a fixture network     The CMA communicates with the DL 2 fixture network in three ways     Web Services  The CMA application physically runs on an end user s machine  but accesses  web services to facilitate all aspects of the required CMA functionality     Discovery Packets  The CMA captures the DL 2 fixture discovery packets to automatically  discover the IP Addresses and Fixture IDs of all the DL 2 fixtures on the network     SMB File Transfers  The cross platform SMB file transfer protocol is used to transfer both  Content and upgrade installer files between the CMA and the DL 2 fixture     Installing the CMA    You can download the latest version of the application for Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 based  system from t
203. ow  CMY adds to all pixels  Increases color values   Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow  CMY adds to non black pixels  Increases color  values  Mod1 cyan  Mod2 magenta   Mod3  yellow  RGB Add  all pixels  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue  RGB Add 2  all pixels  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue  RGB Add  non black pixels  Mod1  red   Mod2 7 green  Mod3  blue  RGB Swap to GBR  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue    27 Global RGB Swap to BRG  Mod1  red   Effect 2 Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Solarize 1 If color value  lt  DMX value  invert color     Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize 2 If color value  gt  DMX  invert color   Mod1  red  Mod2 green  Mod3 blue     Solarize 3 If color value  lt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1 red  Mod2 green  Mod3 blue     Solarize 4 If color value  gt  DMX  set color to O   Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3   gt  blue     DotP and Resample  Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3  control resampling     Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue     All or nothing  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue  If color value  gt  mod value   color   255  else color   0    Solid color RGB  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue           DL 2 User Manual 175    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    RGB Invert Mod1   red to inverted red   Mod2   green to inverted green  Mod3   blue to  inverted blue    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR  Mod1   red to  inverted green  Mod2   green to inverted blue   Mod3   blue to inverted red    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BR
204. p  zussexsuwusuxwaazxzuxEEFVExEFSNEEENFEFFEEEENERUXEEEENFEKUNERERENERNFZEEERANEKUEMEEERNENERE 5  Unpacking the FIXEUFG  5 3  ouest ete ab creda nux E ErrRU A d rU P Enbga ur RR REM REGE a due 5  Pan and TIE MOCKING s issu st suuccun Edid ueRde d ub mUIMeu Du Cem Dddddx M d UM MENU TM NU DEM 5  Attaching a Power Cord Cap            ssssssssssssssssees seem essen nnns 6   Installing a Line Cord Cap   U K  Only                 sssesssse mns 6  Vatic Fitter Heads Information   Danmark                 ssssssssseeen mnn 6  Back Paner CODD GOfiS x  csouudvenqudmdtxutard rd det ses oduExndat EM UE E CR IN EE EEEN ees us 6  DueiMgnjceids dabit I ET ME 8  gecluienia miuelt MT E TTD ENAT 8  Mounting the Fixture Upright sr i3 ia PErA Pacem exi Paop adn uU a Edaquidua CH bea qud  9  Truss MoONEINO cc                 a 9       DL 2 User Manual    EINK  DEZ DOU GS    ooneretaatoudte secun vus asus saree tee edt etas a ate etes iut 10    Setting   p a Standard DMX EINK i ordered vae E tee dese rusa vvv ro cte uta 10  Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link            ccc cece ec eeceeee eee eeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseauanes 11  ENKMNO GroieiiieiUigzi4  on i e ORI SETTE 11  Powerin Ol tHe FUTE oier oim asa utt DI tu cepta n ot ege sa eM M bere Do ad sureil eu IS HERMES 12  HOMINO TNE  FIX TUFE daei E o E 12  Viewing the Display Panel              cccccccce senera A E EEA AE es 13  Software Setup 2 5 255  2 css utossesusu v   baxadaEaFsurEEE KU EEENEEFEEFESEERQUE CES EE EREPGO CERVUS 14  Verifying and U
205. picture duplicates the texture and   x subpicture   y subpicture   subpicture  overlays it on the original center center size  Magnifying ens applies Spee VHS x lens center  y lens center   lens size  that magnifies a portion of the texture  Magnifying cn appiies sposta ovenay x lens center   y lens center  lens size  that magnifies a portion of the texture   Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around  Reduces Enhances Edge  38 detection  picture elements Color Contrast ie  sensitivity    Color DeConverge offsets pixels from original  Moves Red Moves Green  Moves Blue    1  4  3  3  32  3  34  3  3  3    osition ele Pixels down   Pixels down  i P p and right and left          DL 2 User Manual 75    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Value Name Definition _ Modifier 1   Modifier2   Modifier 3    Not Used        Defines  Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used  mirror center    RGB swap to BGR Red to Blue Blue to Red  RGB swap to RBG   Red    Green to Blue Blue to Green  RGB swap to GRB Red to Green Green to Red    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity Selects Color  Selects zero Controls  to color Scheme   intensity point fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity   Selects Color dica Controls    transparent Intensity Transparenc  P bandwidth P y    Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a Controls uerus Controls    liquid surface size speed rangom y raindrop rate    generator  i y axis scaler  Frequency  Frequency    Frequenc
206. play files or folders displayed in the right pane to zero        diting User Content DMX Values   You can manually assign any valid DMX value to your files or folders by selecting the file or  folder in the right pane and then  using the pull down menu or the right click popup  selecting  Edit DMX  A dialog box will allow you to input the DMX value  If it is a valid value from  0 255  the CMA will change the DMX value displayed for the file or folder     Valid DMX Values  Certain DMX values are Reserved for special purposes and are not user assignable  You can  change the assigned DMX value for a User Content item to another valid DMX value  A valid  DMX value is    e From 0 255      s not one of the reserved values for that type of content      Is unique from other content of it s type except for zero    The following table shows valid and reserved values for User Content     1 40 Default Stock media  41 239 User collections    240 254 Reserved    Media Folders   media file collections     No Selection    1 255 Media files     No       No selection  Objects 1 149 Stock 3D Objects    150 255 User 3D Objects    Media Files    er    a   re Sc ee Oe oe   NE EN ee a a  M NE BN   poe   N      No          134 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Moving User Content Files and Folders    User content can be easily moved between fixtures and your local drive as well as between  fixtures  Which method you use depends on       How much content you want
207. plication      Available for Windows and Mac operating systems    e Communicates with DL 2 fixtures over an Ethernet network      Uploads and downloads custom digital content to DL 2 fixtures    e Configures DL 2 fixtures with remote control of all menu commands      Updates software including content  applications  and operating system to DL 2 fixtures     Harduiare     17 Motion Parameters for mechanical fixture control include     Mechanical Iris adjustment to full black out  400 degree Pan and 240 degree Tilt movement  DMX control of projector zoom and focus   DMX control of camera functions    e Integrated digital camera feeds digital video capture directly into the graphic engine that  provides     Optical   digital zoom to increase image up to 216x  Options for 1 30 frame captures   sec  Vertical and or Horizontal image inversion       DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 1  Product Overview        Black and White  Color Negative and Freeze Frame effects      White Balance including Red and Blue gain control  e Infrared illuminator allows video capture even in blackout settings      Remote video input and output switching let you select live video from external source  including another DL 2 fixture s camera feed       Full color display and menu functions    Powered by a 3 2GHZ Pentium 4 HT processor with an ATI X850XT Graphics Processor    Gigabit Ethernet for fast content uploading and multiple fixture synchronization    e Mounting system provides multiple orientation option
208. pload it to your DL 2 fixtures     Auto Discovery   When a DL 2 fixture is connected to a network  it sends out  Discovery  messages  These  messages are received by other DL 2 fixtures as well as the CMA software  The messages  contain information that allows the DL 2 fixtures to communicate with each other  and the CMA  to communicate with all the DL 2 fixtures on the network  This information includes the IP  Address  Fixture ID  and the DL 2 software version     Fixtures derive their IP addresses through a router or automatic IP assignment     Fixture Identification  The Fixture ID is used in the control protocol to identify specific fixtures for sychronization  functions     NOTE  Toensure that sychronization works properly  each fixture should  be assigned a unique fixture ID     The Management Client Windoui    The CMA application s Management Client Window uses a simplified Windows Explorer style  user interface with views of the content and configuration of all DL 2 servers connected to the  ethernet network  You can access options for each view from the drop down menu at the top  of the Management Client Window or with a right click in the right pane     NOTE  You cannot drag folders or files between the left and right panes of  the CMA window     A Status Bar at the bottom of the page  indicates the number of files or folders within a  selected folder in the left pane  as well as free space on the computer harddrive        128 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Conten
209. ploading Fixture Software               sssssssssssssseee meme nns 14  Installing and Launching the Content Management Application  CMA                   14  Conftgurttig  Laz DIS CSS   cs tano gegen quo ortu dtumup A Uu put Meu Lud QU DOR amatUE UN 15  Setup Configuration Using the Menu System                  sssssssee nnn 15  Setup Configuration Using the CMA           cccccece cece cece eens HH 16  Shutting Down the FIXtUle           isissvesu Eu uuuuswuEEEnRESRRERAREAERRESEAERESRAESRERERRRRRER REREN 17  Recommended Shutdown Options            cccccecece cece ee eeee este enne nnne nnn 17  Placing  Fixture In Road CASE 4 oenatetucus idet haa Spn Pia ToU LOC hem DP obere EE RE EE  E 17    Chapter 3  The DL 2 Menu System  You can use the DL 2 fixture s Menu System to configure the fixture  review  diagnostic feedback  and view content information     Menu Panel Components    x uana nRRRERRRRRERRRRARRRRRRRRERRRFRRRRREERRRSRERERRRRRRRSRRRRREES 19  LCD Display Adjustment Buttons reeeo ena eee cece eeeeee sehen nnn 20  LED Display POWEFr BUTON    ssosi ry sot toit disease Mec doanh te ien cda PES DUE 20  LCD Display Menu Options and Selection            cc cc cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaneees 20  Navigating the Menu seeicccccseiniecdededsdndsddedaveamedanessmesensanddeenenseeseseseesedadenesecaans 21  DL 2 Men   Options     iossouos esu usuk nue uEEEsREKEEFAEEEFEREKSEEEAWEKTEPEEEXASASVXEERERKEEEEFERREEFEEE 22  Menu Screen Descriptions         sssusswsswuuuusuusERARRAERARS
210. producto  podr  an afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad  relevantes     FCC Information    This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device  pursuant to  part 15 of the FCC rules  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment  This equipment generates  uses   and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  manual  may cause harmful interference to radio communications  Operation of this equipment in a  residential area is likely to cause harmful interference  in which case the user will be required to correct the  interference at his own expense     Important Safetu Information    Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire  electric shock  and injury to persons are found in  Appendix E  Please read all instructions prior to assembling  mounting  and operating this equipment     Important  Informations De S  curit     Les instructions se rapportant    la protection permanente contre les incendies  l   lectrocution  excessif et aux  blessures corporelles se trouvent dans l Annexe E  Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler  de  monter ou d utiliser cet   quipement     Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise   Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer  elektrischen Schlag  und Verletzung von Person
211. r DMX value for media files     The File Name for media or object files     The File DMX value for media or object files    To view the DMX summary table     l  Select All Servers from the left pane of the Management Client Window    2  Select a Server in the right pane   3  Select DMX Summary from the drop down menu or the right click popup list   4     Press the Create Table button on the screen to build the summary table     Upgrading Software    Upgrade Management allows the user to upgrade the DL 2 fixture applications  Mac OS 10 4 or  the XP Embedded operating system  and fixture firmware on the system     Verifying Software Versions  Running the latest version of both the CMA Client software and the DL 2 Server software will  ensure that you will get the best performance from the fixtures on your network     To verify the CMA version  select About from the Help drop down menu  The DL 2 software  version is displayed for each server on the network in the All Servers view        DL 2 User Manual 141    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Note  Although running different versions of software on servers is not  prohibited  it is highly recommended that all servers on the network  be running the same software version       HighEnd DL  Management Client    File Servers Help    HIGH END SYSTEMS       E All Servers  4 servers  ServerID   Server Mame   IP Address    Software Version   Madel       m M brian  5  Bs brian 182 158 1 106 1 0 0 206 DL2     three  3  h
212. r more  information  see Attaching a Power Cord Cap on page 6     To power on the DL 2 fixture  simply connect it to an appropriately rated power source  It is  very important that you shutdown and disconnect power to the fixture before performing  certain procedures discussed in this manual     Homing the Fixture   When the DL 2 fixture is connected to an appropriately rated power source  it automatically  begins a homing procedure to verify that the major functions of the fixture and its internal  projector are oriented properly     Shortcut  Holding down the inner most  i e  middle  two menu tab buttons for  more than two seconds will home the unit        12 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Viewing the Display Panel  The DL 2 display panel gives access to the fixture   s onboard menu system  Chapter 3  The DL 2  Menu System describes the menu system configuration options in detail     Note  Most configuration features are also available through the Content Management  Application  CMA   see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 144        DL 2 User Manual 13    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Software Setup    Verifying and Uploading Fixture Software    The latest fixture software is always available at the High End Systems website    www highend com  support   You can view the fixture   s currently installed software version  under the Info tab of the fixture   s menu system   see Info Version Screen on page 32  or  through the CMA s 
213. r rear screen projection applications     Projector Control M b t to On to displ teat  rojector Control Menu can be set to On to display REAR OFF  the projector s menu system  In this state  the INPUT3 SVIDEO    directional front panel buttons  multi directional switch   SYSTEM AUTO    and the buttons on either side of it  control the INPUT 1 RGB    projector menu rather than the LCD menu  SCREEN NORMAL    INPUT2 RGB    To revert back to the Menu display  press one of the six  POWERMANAGEMENT       OFF  side menu buttons  When the Projector Control Menu is   LOGO OFF    set to Off  the projector control menu is not displayed   NORMAL    Turning Projector Defaults On will reset all the  options on the Projector tab to their factory default  settings  For more information  refer to the Projector       User Manual that shipped with your DL 2 fixture     File Screen   The File screen displays information about  the currently selected content file  Use this  screen to preview content     both still images  and movies     DHA TopMac    Feedback Vidi  HES Atmosph  HES Core   HES Digital A  HFS Minital A     k r   gt  D   quem   Gm i    Acrial_ Effect  012   Aerial Effect 015       Aerial Effect O60   GENE GENE cu ene oc   Aerial Effect 108       ell Alarm Gear mnpa    DMX Value  2  Contains  108 files        When you select the File tab  the file plays in m   the window to the left  The bottom right  window displays content folders and  highlights the current file location     You c
214. rae maroc ER er Ran C rx Rau dU ERR KR ge OR ART 108  Edge Detect GOlOF ape TD 108  FROPIZONCAL NITOE erra ante antetomaiaie tail oh ntti ee ty wee Coena ta AE E EAEAN 109  WAGAITVING ko mcer E HET 109  MAGNIFYING  ESNS 2 3  55  sec    aa tunc t acia ida sega tout MSS a nosse dias qae d 109  PIKO S DWISU SL E EPI LEM MM M RM M E LE 110  Rely OD  MEET TEE TE QE Ue 110  Sinewave  Circular w X axis Wobbulation           ccc cece eee cece eee mnn 111  Sinewave  Circular w Z axis Wobbulation            cece eee eee eee e seen mmn 111  Sinewave  Horizontal w  X axis Wobbulation          cece cee eee eee ee ee eeeeeeeeneeeeees 112  Sinewave  Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation 2 0       cece c cece eee e ee ee eeeeeaeeneeeenes 112  Sinewave  Vertical w X axis Wobbulation            cece cc eeee eee cece cease neers mnn 113  Sinewave  Vertical w Y axis Wobbulation           ccc cc ceee eee cece eeee eee mns 113  Sinewave  Vertical w Z axis Wobbulation           ccc ccc eee eee cece cease eee mmn 113  Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular          ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesuaens 114  Texture Ripple  HOrizontal xs tetas road RUE Uttar PEDI dead i drag teta a IRR 115  Texture  Ripple  Vertical  23523 9 M rv vET ADR Eten ap nU epu dadun ue tani ie iad 115  piger LUI 116  Tans parent deccm t  nm 117    Chapter 12  Fixture Motion Functions  This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it s internal    projector    Pan and Tilt       255225556 vsueacusEEEE
215. ration option under the individual server        To view configuration information for all Servers on the network  select All Configurations in  the left pane  The right pane now displays configuration values for all the DL 2 servers on the  fixture link in a sortable table  Click in the column heading to sort by that column   s values  A    symbol appears in the    sort by    column heading     Editing Configuration Values  The Configuration table viewed in the right pane of the CMA window contains the following  information for one or all servers     e The server ID from 1 255  e The IP Address  e The configuration item name    e The current option setting       144 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     A right click on a item will popup a list including Refresh  Edit or Reset  You can also double   click an item to bring up the edit dialog box  The Edit dialog box lets you choose between  available options for that item          HighEnd DL  Management Client  Fille Configuration Help    s HIGH END SYSTEMS        ES All Servers  1 server  IP Address  WEE 00D EE  Za susan  2  132 158 501  227 Fixture Hours 150  H D User Content 192 166 50  227 Fixture Hours Reset  E User Objects 192 168 50  227 Model        EC Stock Content 132 158  50 227  Fixture Name M       192 166 50 227 Home Iris    o0mFoce    3 B3 Mi W e A 0 DO Dna    ids 19215850227 Home Motion      Bi     i  All Configuration 19216850227 Home Pan Til Dii  19216850 227 Lamp Hours Res
216. ring  On the Fixture on page 12   For information on obtaining a terminator  see Related Products and  Optional Accessories on page 3  You can construct a terminator according to the specifications  listed in Cable and Connector Specifications on page 225     Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link   DL 2 fixtures utilize an Ethernet network to synchronize playback and access the CMA software  for remote content management and fixture configuration  If you are using a DMX console and  other automated lighting products compatible with ethernet  this network can also serve as the  link for DMX control     Linking Configurations   The following diagrams show configuration options for linking DL 2 fixtures to each other via  ethernet for accessing the Content Management Application running on your computer and to  the DMX512 link for DMX desk control     DMX Universe 2       Laptop Computer WholeHog 3 Console    EM DMX 512 Data Cabling  Ethernet Cabling    Configuration Option 1       DL 2 User Manual 11    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    DMX Universe 1 DMX Universe 2    e e  l       Laptop Computer WholeHog 3 Console    Sea Ses Ir DMX 512 Data Cabling  Ethernet Cabling    Configuration Option 2    Powering On the Fixture    WARNING   This equipment is designed for connection to a branch circuit    having a maximum overload protection of 20 A     CAUTION   Do not power on the fixture until verifying that the line cord    cap is suitable for the power source in your location  Fo
217. rtoon Edge  Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38 NA  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity  Color DeConverge ES  3    Mod1  Moves red up  Mod2   Moves green down 9  and right  Mod3   Moves blue down and left    Horizontal Mirror  Mod1   mirror center  Mod2 and  Mod3 not used    RGB Swap to BGR 41  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue  RGB Swap to RBG 42  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GRB  Mod1   red  Mod2   green  Mod3   blue    Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color   Mod1   Color Scheme selection  Mod2   Zero 44  intensity point in color scheme  Mod3   Fading    Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity  transparent  Mod1  Color Scheme selection    Mod2   Intensity bandwidth  Mod3    1 128 45  makes selected intensity transparent  129 255   inverts transparency     Raindrop effect  Mod1 controls size speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3 46  controls raindrop rate     40    43          210 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and  Mod3 sets overall color range  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2  Mod1  x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used   Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 49 63  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Si
218. s    Related Products and Optional Accessories    The following table lists related products and accessories available for the DL 2 fixture  For more  information  contact your High End Systems dealer distributor  see Contacting High End  Systems  amp  on page ii      Heavy duty 5 pin XLR cable  100            DL 2 User Manual 3    CHAPTER 1  Product Overview       4 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter e     Setup and Configuration    Hardware setup includes mounting  connecting to power and Ethernet and  DMX linking  Software setup includes launching the Content Management  Application  CMA  and configuration options     Hardware Setup    Unpacking the Fixture    Your DL 2 fixture ships in a road case specifically designed to protect the product during  transport  When unpacking  inspect both the outside of the fixture and the projector for physical  damage to components     Your DL 2 fixture ships with the following     One DL 2 fixture in road case     Two mounting brackets     One safety cable    e Documentation CD that contains      CMA application      User Manual in  pdf format      Fixture software      Recovery software image    High End Systems assumes no responsibility for products that are damaged during transport   Return a product for repair in its road case     Before sending anything to the factory  call your High End Systems dealer  distributor  for a Return Material Authorization  RMA  number  The factory cannot accept any  goods shipped without an RMA number     Pa
219. s   Fans remain on to maintain the temperature control for the internal graphics engine     Display Options  The Display field lets you adjust the black level of the Menu display with the following options     e On is the factory default       Preview displays the most recent media change of any Graphic function  when opacity  gt  0   The DL 2 Menu screen displays content in both partial and full screen  The Preview function  can be enabled from the DL 2 menu  the CMA  as well as remotely via DMX     e When Preview is enabled  a partial  full color video is shown on the LCD display along with the  folder  file  and DMX information  If there is no change of content on any Graphic Function it  will automatically switch to full screen mode within 12 seconds       The Preview function always shows the latest selected content without any modification of  effects  Preview mode displays movies and still images only  S video and internal camera  input will not be displayed in the Preview mode    Note  After selecting the On or Preview option  you can use the numeric up down control  to adjust the Menu display brightness level from 25  dim  to 100  brightest         28 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 3  The DL 2 Menu System    e Off turns off the display after 20 seconds of inactivity  Touching any button on the fixture  menu will re enable the display     The Display Invert field inverts the display and navigation control functions  This is useful in  certain fixture orientations  There 
220. s  Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be  accepted  Prepaid shipping does not include rush expediting such as air freight  Air freight can be sent  customer collect in the continental United States     REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE  CONSUMER OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE  HIGH END SYSTEMS  INC  MAKES NO  WARRANTIES  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT  AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY  DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE  HIGH END  SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT  INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE  INCLUDING LOST  PROFITS  SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT  DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION   WHETHER IN CONTRACT  TORT  INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE   STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE  AND  WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN     Warranty is void if the product is misused  damaged  modified in any way  or for unauthorized repairs or  parts  This warranty gives you specific legal rights  and you may also have other rights specific to your  locality     Patents   This product is protected by one or more patents including  US 4 392 187  US 4 602 321  US 4 688 161   US 4 701 833  US 4 709 311  US 4 779 176  US 4 800 474  US 4 962 687  US 4 972 306  US 4 980 806   US 5 010 459  US 5 031 078  US 5 073 847  US 5 078 039  US 5 186 536  US 5 
221. s and warnings to alert you when a filter  needs to be cleaned or replaced  These appear in a large format that can be viewed from a  distance  The Info Status menu screen will include a detailed message concerning the large  format Error Warning filter message  The following messages will give you information  regarding the status of the DL 2 filter system       Filter Missing Error  A filter not present or is not installed properly  Check and insert  missing filter       Filter Service Warning  The filter system is not operating optimally and needs to be  serviced soon       Filter Service Error  The filter system needs immediate servicing  Replace Filter     For these and other Error Warning messages  see Status Message Menu Display on page 157     Cleaning and Replacing Filters  The DL 2 system utilizes multiple filters to protect the internal media server and projector       A filter is located on the side of the fixture base housing attached with velcro for easy  removal and cleaning  Check this filter often for dust or debris that can be caused when  using the DL 2 in environments with confetti or pyrotechnics  This filter is washable  but  must be completely dry before re installing       The Fixture head contains both a hepa filter and a prefilter      The internal projector has two filters    Check the following warnings and cautions before servicing the filters     WARNINGS   AN Disconnect power before servicing     Replace fuses with the specified type and rating 
222. s surcharges de 20 A     Mise En Garde  Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs  Electriques    L     Si cet   quipement est livr   sans prise de cable  veuillez connecter la prise de cable correcte  selon le code suivant    e marron   phase   e bleu   neutre   e  vert jaune   terre   D  brancher le courant avant de changer les lampes ou d effectuer des r  parations    Cet   quipement doit   tre uniquement utilis   dans des endroits secs  Ne pas l exposer    la  pluie ou l humidit      A l int  rieur de l   quipement il n y a pas de pi  ces remplacables par    utilisateur  Confiez  l entretien    un personnel qualifi       Equipement de Classe    Cet   quipement doit   tre mis    la terre        228    DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX E  Safety Information    Anhang      Wichtige Hinuieise F  r Ihre Sicherheit    Warnung  Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr    l     Dieses Ger  t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem   berlastungsschutz von h  chstens 20  A angeschlossen werden     Warnung  Zum Schutz Gegen Gefahrliche Korperstrome    l     Wenn dieses Ger  t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde  ist der entsprechende  Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen     e Braun   Unter Spannung stehend   e Blau   Neutral   e Grun Gelb   Erde   Vor dem Austauschen von Lampen oder vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen     Diese Ger  te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m  ssen vor Regen und  Feuchtigkeit gesch  tzt werden     Servic
223. se image rotation around Z axis  slow to fast     This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object  You can  also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the  composite image   see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 89      Tip  Using this parameter you can turn one object around another       Original Object 1 and Object 2 Z axis Rotation Applied to Object 2       DL 2 User Manual 55    CHAPTER 7  Graphic Functions  Rotation  Position  Scale    Scaling the Object    You can scale an Graphic Object along the X  Y and or Z axis to adjust the object size     The Scale parameter adjusts the size of the object   s image up to approximately 10x its  original size  At a DMX value of zero  the image shrinks to a dot  At the midpoint of the DMX  value range  the image is normal size  When the DMX value is increased from the midpoint   the image is enlarged  In addition  when the DMX value is reduced below the midpoint  an  inverted image is enlarged     Use the X Y and Z Scale parameters together to enlarge or shrink a 3 D object  proportionally     X Scale    The X Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the x axis  either expanding it or  making it smaller  Use it when you want to size the object   s horizontal component     A DMX value of 128  50   sets the object at its normal size  Values less than 50  shrink the  object horizontally to the smallest at 0  Values greater then 50  enlarge the object  h
224. see  TA Input from Camera to Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 144  Once the  Graphics Engine  default  PAP is made  allow about 10 seconds for the change to take  effect        CAUTION   Do not physically connect both the VGA and the RGBHV connectors at the  same time  Doing so can damage the projector and void the warranty        DL 2 User Manual 121    CHAPTER 12  Fixture Motion Functions    Using the Internal Projector   s Menu  To use the native projector menu system under DMX control     1  Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to zero  2  Set the Control parameter DMX value to 182  This will access the projector   s main menu     3  Next  change the DMX value of the Control panel to zero  This command is equivalent to  releasing the key on the projector   s keypad  Failure to release the key will result in  unpredictable performance     Optional  If the projector is mounted on the ceiling  flip the display by selecting a Control  parameter DMX value from 209 212     4  Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to 255  100   to view the projector menu   s on   screen display     5  Adjust the Zoom and Focus parameters to bring the display into focus  Now the control  parameter   s Projector Floor Orientation  Projector Ceiling Orientation  Projector Front  Projection and Projector Rear Projection commands map to the Projector   s menu control  buttons     6  Use the projector   s on screen display as discussed in the projector   s user manual that  shipped with your DL
225. separate 2D 3D objects    e Image Optimizing Controls let you adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for  each image    e 30 Object parameters give you graphic controls for each individual media stream including     A choice of multiple play modes and play speeds   The ability to define any segment of a video loop including Scrub capability  Multiple color mixing and visual effects that can be combined any way you choose  Variable Opacity to allow for crossfading or dissolves between media streams   Full control of image Rotation  Positioning and Scaling on X  Y and Z axes   Visual Modes that let you control black level and contrast to optimize content  Video input or camera capture you can apply to 2d 3d objects    e 35 Global parameters provide graphic controls to the composite image created by up to 3  media streams    Collage Generator combines output of the same file from multiple DL 2 fixtures into a  smooth panorama array    Intensity overlays the opacity control to provide system wide intensity level   Overall image Color Mixing applied to composite media stream image   Color Effects including edge colors allow for combined image color mixing   Multiple Mask selections with edge fading and strobe effects   Edge fading for creating montages   Keystone correction on output projection   Viewpoint controls provide ability to change viewing angle perspective on images    e Multiple modes for synchronizing all networked DL 2 fixtures     Content Management Ap
226. ser Content that  can be restored to any DL 2 server     Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline   You can create a Local Archive of files stored on your harddrive to be deployed to a server at  another time  This lets you work on organizing files for a specific show offline and then upload  it to a server at a later date     Creating a Local Archive    For CMA Running Windows XP  1  Under the FILE menu  select Create Local Archive to launch the archiving wizard     Create Local Content Archive Wizard    HIGH END SYSTEMS    Selected Media Folders and Medea Files oeleched Object Files    E  Seng 1 z  Add Media Folder CMDacumenta and Settings mat   C lecumenis ed Sa C  Documents end Settings mali  CADecumenite and E     Add Media CDocumerts and Settings matt   RETE eae E CXDacumer  es end Settings    mat    Song 2   c Remove Media   C Documerts and Setlings maltt    song i DER ICI  CMDacumeres and Settings mati  ir   erniszizri  Fras       u             2  Click on Add Media Folder  This will add a media folder to the left hand column named     MyMedia0    Each successive media folder will be named    MyMedial  MyMedia2  and so  forth  You can rename these folders by single clicking on the name of the folder    3  After creating a folder and renaming it  if you wish   highlight the folder to add media  files     4  Click Add Media  This will bring up a file browser window that will allow you to navigate  to the spot on your hard drive containing the media you want to ad
227. ser Manual iii    Product Modification Warning    High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and  International safety regulations  Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non   compliant to relevant safety standards     Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit   Les produits High End Systems sont concus et fabriqu  s conform  ment aux exigences des r  glements  internationaux de s  curit    Toute modification du produit peut entrainer sa non conformit   aux normes de  s  curit   en vigueur     Produktmodifikationswarnung   Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S  Amerikanischen und  internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften  Abanderungen dieses Produktes k  nnen dessen Sicherheit  beeintr  chtigen und unter Umst  nden gegen die diesbez  glichen Sicherheitsnormen versto  en     Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto     prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di  sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali  Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e  rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti     Advertencia De Modificaci  n Del Producto   Los productos de High End Systems est  n disenados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las  reglamentaciones de seguridad de los Estados Unidos e internacionales  Las modificaciones al 
228. set    Texture Ripple  Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Chromakey Fine  Select key color using  Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Medium  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Coarse  Select key color using  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Chromakey Inverse  Fine  Select key color using                 ll ll         NO NO    N    Q2 oO OO N N N N N N  N O  i91  gt  C2 NO   co Co N O  C1  gt  N         Effect Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue  76  Mode 2 isl Cid Inverse  Sum  Select eh color  Chromakey  ors Coarse  Select key color  using Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Scan Line  Mod1 selects scan line as texture   Mod2 fades from original image to converted  image  Mod3 not used  reserved    C2    Transparent Wipes  Mod1  width of transparent  area  Mod2  center of transparent area   Mod3 transparency mode    Pixel Twist  Mod1   x twist center  Mod2   y twist center   Mod3  z direction and amount of twist    Picture in Picture  Mod1  x subpicture center  Mod2   y subpicture  center  Mod3  subpicture size    C2    Magnifying Lens  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2  y lens center   Mod3 lens size    oO    Magnifying Lens 2  Mod1  x lens center  Mod2   y lens center   Mod3   lens size          DL 2 User Manual 189    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Cartoon Edge   Mod1   Edge Color  Mod2  Contrast  38  Mod3  Edge detection sensitivity   C
229. size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    48          214 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sede   Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3 blue         c a edo  Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3  blue E  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect 0 15 255    453   Effect Mode 2   Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no   g oss   4 490  Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Effect Mode 2   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect  0 255   1 100  Effect Mode 2   Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers  Modifier 3 may not be used  0 255   1 100    Graphic 3 Rotation    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around X axis  fast to slow  mm  32768  50       Continuous rotation stop         rotation    Continuous rotation stop         16383   X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X  16384  26 49  Rotation axis 
230. sk Color L Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   128    This option applies color to a selected mask shape    Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation        98 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Mask Color and Edge Fade Color C Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   130    This option applies a color to both the selected Mask shape and any selected Edge parameter   Color can also be applied to Mask shape  see Picture in Picture on page 110  and Edge  parameter s  separately     Modifier 1   ncreases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum blue saturation     Modifier 3  Increases green color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum green saturation     RGB Add  All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   4    This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model     Modifier 1  Increases red color component from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     maximum  red saturation     Modifier 2  Increases blue c
231. so takes less time than a full restore     Note  Because this method does not completely erase the DL 2 hard drive   it also does not return the device to a factory state  To guarantee a  complete return to a factory state  you must perform a full system  restore        164 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 16  Restoring the System    Performing the System Restore    Follow steps 1 8 for a partial system restore  Continue through step 12 for a full system    restore     1  Position your fixture so that you can view the DL 2 menu on the LCD display     2  Plug your USB CD or DVD drive  keyboard  and mouse  optional  into one of the external  USB ports on the DL 2  If necessary  you may need to use a USB hub  although this should  only be a requirement if you wish to use a mouse     3  Power on or reboot the DL 2  When you see    Hit any key to boot from CD       press a key on  your keyboard     4  Allow the System Restore menu to load  Depending on the speed of your USB drive  it will  take between 3 5 minutes load  During this time  a number of small windows will appear  and disappear  Wait until you see a full screen menu titled DL 2 System Restore Menu     DL2 System Restore Menu         Partial Restore  Preserving Content  Exit    5  Using the  lt Tab gt  key on your keyboard or using your mouse  select the type of restore you  wish to perform           DL 2 User Manual 165    CHAPTER 16  Restoring the System    6  The next page will ask you to confirm your selection  Press  Co
232. speed  Mod2  seeds the random number generator  and Mod3  controls raindrop rate   Effect  114 Mode 2 Scale RGB  Mod1  scale red  Mod2 scale green   Mod3 scale blue  Maximum of Mod1  Mod2 and 47  Mod3 sets overall color range  Tiling On  Scaler of 128 1 to 1  Note  Tiling on  Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2    Mod1 x axis tiling scaler  Mod2 y axis tiling  scaler  Mod3 not used     Reserved  Defaults to effect 0 49 63    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Circular with Z axis Wobbulation    Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    Sinewave  Vertical with X axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset    48          202 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Sinewave  Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation  Mod1  size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sinewave  Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation  Mod1 size  Mod2 rate  Mod3 offset  Sede   Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3 blue        Hs Glow  Mod1  red  Mod2   green  Mod3  blue E  Glow Color Cycle  Mod1  red cycle speed   Mod2  green cycle speed  Mod3  Blue cycle  speed  Reserved  defaults to Effect 0 15 255    445   Effect Mode 2   Adju
233. sts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no   g 55s   4 490  Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum  Effect Mode 2   adjustment at 255  100    The type of  Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect  0 255   1 100  Effect Mode 2   Note  for some effects  one or more modifiers  Modifier 3 may not be used  0 255   1 100    Graphic 2 Rotation    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around X axis  fast to slow  mm  32768  50       Continuous rotation stop         rotation    Continuous rotation stop         16383   X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X  16384  26 49  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767   0   rotation around X axis     rotation around X  0   rotation around X axis     32768    vertical flip  165 Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769    54 74  bit adjustment    steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151      Continuous rotation stop        rotation    Continuous rotation stop        49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around X axis  slow to fast  65535  Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24  object rotation around Y axis  fast to slow  Pan     Continuous rotation stop         rotation    Continuous rotation stop         16383  Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y    16384    c yo  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767  32768  50     horizontal fo     retaionaround Y axis 0   rotation around Y axis     ro
234. t LED indicates  connection    DMX data going out    Ethernet port to    Two USB ports 5 pin DMX512 connect DL 2 fixtures  for peripherals Data In and to fixture link and  including hard drives Data Out personal computer    running the CMA               RECEIVE Q lo 6    LiNKQ    100 120 V  USB 2  50 60Hz  7A   200 240 V    50 60Hz  3 5 A D   C       ETHERNET    00     00000       CAMERA SVIDEO  DUT IN       VGA I tf  S Video Output enu    external source  to another DL 2 RGBHV input  fixture for external  S Video In video source        DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    Mounting the Fixture    You can mount DL 2 fixtures suspended from a support system  such as a truss  or freestanding  on its base     WARNING   Equipment suitable for dry locations only  Do not expose this    equipment to rain or moisture     CAUTION   Always use a secondary safety cable when mounting this    fixture     Maintain a minimum focus distance of 1 4 meters from a  C14 M combustible object     z   Do not mount on a flammable surface   A Ss     Note  Due to the wide variety of possible lighting designs  High End  Systems cannot make specific mounting recommendations  Consider  the following procedure as a suggested guideline only     Fog Machine Warning   Like all high quality video projection units  the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from  excessive amounts of glycol fog  mineral oil  and smoke  DL 2 incorporates a two stage air  filtering system with additional washabl
235. t Management Application  CMA     Viewing Server Identification Information   Selecting the All Server view displays all the DL 2 servers on the fixture network  In the  following example  four servers have been identified on the network  The right pane contains  the following details in a table format       Server ID number defaults to 1  but can be configured in the CMA or in a fixture s Menu  system  see DMX Control Screen on page 25       Server Name is a name you assign to a fixture    IP Address is assigned to that fixture by the router or Auto IP    Software Version Number    e Model identifies the fixture type      HighEnd DL  Management Client          File Servers Help    HIGH END SYSTEMS    All Servers  4 servers  Model             brian  5  brian 192 168 1 1068 1 0 0 206 DL2  three  3  two 192 168 1 108 1 0 0 218 DL2  ane  1  three 192 166 1 103 1 0 0 21585 DL2  twa  2  one 192 168 1 104 1 0 0 218 Axon    ic All Configuration    Note  Clicking ina column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column    In the All Server view  the drop down menu or a right click on a server in the right pane gives  you the these options     e Refresh the screen      Clone Content replicates the server s user content to one or more other servers on the  network   see page 140        Delete Content removes all the user content from the server       Create Content Archive lets you back up all the server s user content to a compressed  file   see page 139        Deploy
236. tation around Y axis 32768   16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769  51 74   adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151  Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around Y axis  slow to fast  65535          DL 2 User Manual 203    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol       Continuous rotation stop     rotation    Continuous rotation stop     16383    Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z  16384  26 49  Rotation axis in steps to  720 degrees absolute 32767    0   rotation around Z axis 32768   circular 16 bit   Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in 32769     4 74  adjustment  steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151   Continuous rotation stop 49152    Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154  76 100  rotation around Z axis  slow to fast  65535    Graphic 2 Scaling    Minimum object size along X axis  1 10    oO   0   Increases object size along X axis from minimum 4 197 1 49  to actual size  4 128   50    Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0  0 24  object rotation around Z axis  fast to slow  16382  32768  50    Actual size along X axis  1 1     Increases object size along X axis from actual to 129 254   51 99  maximum size    Maximum object size along X axis  10 1     Minimum object size along Y axis  1 10  o o   Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 1 127 1 49  to actual size  125   Scale Y 128   50    Actual size along Y axis  1 1     Increases object size
237. ter Speed   1 220 255   87 100    Indoor 64 95   26 38    Enable Manual Red and Blue gain value 128 191 50 74  adjustment    EEENE S     Camera    Freeze Frame ON  B amp W ON 224 255   89 100    Red gain adjustment  Requires White Balance i E    Blue Gain adjustment  Requires White Balance i i   aan oas  oo  o  o          DL 2 User Manual 171    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Global Functions   Standard  Dual  Single Protocol     22 Global Selects intensity level for the composite image 0 255   0 100   255   100  Intensity    Global Effects    CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB   Reduces color values  Mod1 cyan   Mod2 magenta  Mod3  yellow    CMY adds to all pixels  Increases color values   Mod1  cyan  Mod2  magenta  Mod3  yellow    CMY adds to non black pixels  Increases color  values  Mod1 cyan  Mod2 magenta   Mod3  yellow    RGB Add  all pixels  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue    RGB Add 2  all pixels  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue    RGB Add  non black pixels  Mod1  red   Mod2 green  Mod3  blue    RGB Swap to GBR  Mod1 red  Mod2 green   Mod3 blue   RGB Swap to BRG  Mod1 7 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    Global   Effect 1 Solarize 1 If color value  lt  DMX value  invert color   Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 2 If color value  gt  DMX  invert color   Mod1  red  Mod27 green  Mod3  blue     Solarize 3 If color value    DMX  set color to O   Mod1 red  Mod27 green  Mod3 7 blue     Solarize 4 If color value    DMX  set color to O   Mod1 red  Mod2  green  Mo
238. tify 3D objects     Assigning DMX Values Automatically   The CMA can automatically assign a unique DMX value to any file or folder on a fixture that  does not already have a value  This automated assignment is based on alphabetically sorting  the existing file folder names  and assigning each item a unique consecutive integer     To automatically assign DMX values to a single file or folder with user content     l  Display the User content folder or file in the right pane of the CMA Window    2  Select AutoSet DMX from either the Media Files folder or 3D Objects drop down menu  or the right click popup list  The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to the file or the folder        DL 2 User Manual 133    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     You can automatically assign DMX values to all folders at once or to all the files within a folder  at once  You cannot set both files and folder values at the same time  To automatically assign  DMX values to all the User content folders or all files within a User content folder   l  Display the User content folders or the files for a single folder in the right pane of the  Content Management window and deselect all files or folders     2  Select Autoset All DMX from either the Media Folders or 3D Objects drop down menu  or the right click popup list  The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to all selected files or  folders     Using the same steps  you can also Reset DMX for a single file or folder or Reset All DMX for  all dis
239. timization option  pea Conai Adjusts color shift  Control Color    64 DL 2 User Manual    l l Algorithm  Color to B W ips colors to black white with no es ae Not Used  gray Black White          CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Content Optimization    Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   1    Stock content provided by High End Systems on your DL 2 fixture has been optimized for  lighting applications  This option lets you make the same adjustments for User content or  camera input  Content Optimization adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize  the projected image for your performance environment  You can use it to easily modify the  black level and contrast for a specific application  The Exposure Control option provides an  alternative algorithm for accomplishing this optimization     Modifier 1  Adjusts black level from 0   no adjustment to 255  100     full black   Modifier 2  Adjusts contrast from 0   no adjustment to 255  100   for maximum contrast     Tip  All the factory content provided has been optimized already  This parameter is especially  useful for optimizing User content or camera capture        DL 2 User Manual 65    CHAPTER 8   Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects   Push to Sepia   Visual Mode Parameter DMX value   2   This option converts all color in the image to sepia tones     Modifier 1  Fades from original color at a DMX value   O0 to a range of sepia shades at a  value of 255  100      Modifier 2  Adjusts color saturatio
240. ting    This section discusses troubleshooting LED states and general troubleshooting suggestions     Button Shortcut Commands  DL 2 fixtures have button commands available for controlling and overriding functionality  when you are troubleshooting your fixture       Holding the  Menu   amp   Enter  buttons for more than two seconds disables motion system   Motors are still energized so unit can be pointed for trouble shooting  To Exit this mode   press the  Menu   amp   Enter  buttons again for two seconds  or send a Global Reset  command     e Holding down the middle two menu Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds initiates  a Global Reset of the motion hardware and homes the unit     e Holding down the second from the top and second from the bottom Tab Select buttons for  more than two seconds opens the iris when the fixture software is not running to allow  navigation for content upgrades and motion uploads  To Exit this mode  press the same  button combination again for more than two seconds        NW A  Press at the same    i       9     yo 9 4 7    Press at the    stop homing    O    e NaM          Large Format Error Warning Message Display    Status Message Menu Display   The DL 2 fixture menu displays error warning information in two ways  The first is the large  block format that can be viewed from a distance when the menu is idle  When there is more  than one message  the large format display cycles through the messages  Each message  displays for 3 seconds be
241. tion     Exposure Control provides finer Contrast and Black level control than than the Content  Optimization option which pushes colors to saturation more quickly     Modifier 1  Adjusts black level from 0   full black through 255  100     brightest  At a  DMX value of 128  50   there is no adjustment     Modifier 2  from O   least contrast through 255  100     maximum contrast  At a DMX  value of 128  5096  there is no adjustment     Tip  All the factory content provided has been optimized already  This parameter is especially  useful for optimizing user content or camera capture        DL 2 User Manual 73    CHAPTER 8  Graphic Functions  Opacity and Effects    Effect   Mode and Effect 2 Mode    Two Effect Mode parameters are available for each individual 3 D object  each with three  Modifier parameters  Both Effect parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect  options  This lets you apply a dual  effect combination to the selected 3 D object     Note  Not all modes combine effectively  For example  you cannot glow a  wobbulating object very well     The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and its three  associated Modifier parameters  You can find a detailed description and example of each  option in Chapter 11  Effect Mode Descriptions on page 93     Value Name Definition Modifier 1   Modifier 2   Modifier 3     9  Satenoatecssseston M  OM MA   4 RGBadsapbels Red Omm Be   5  RObadilalph Rea   Gren Be         RGB addto ali
242. tment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Circular w Y axis Wobbulation M Object Effect        Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   65    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Circular w Z axis Wobbulation  Object Effect  Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   66    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset       DL 2 User Manual 111    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode 
243. to  view its configuration information in the right pane       HighEnd DL  Management Client       File Configuration Help    HIGH END SYSTEMS        E e All Servers  4 servers  IP Address         a g Mr TA  1 10 0 1 220 Art Net Subnet    ci 4c User Media 1 10 0 1 220 Art Met Universe     o Lf  User Objects 1 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space rn    H  le Stock Media ONERE wr ERE  m    EN WUT  ELTE ENES    B  Ed Coes 1 10 0 1 220 DMX Source DMX512  son  1  1 10 0 1 220 Start Channel 001  QOUCFIAECDBA  1  1 10 0 1 220 Data Loss Timeout Iri Reset Long    Matt s DL 2  1  1 10 0 1 220 Display Invert On     All Configuration 1 10 0 1 220 Display Level On  1 10 0 1 220 Fisture Defaults Ot  1 10 0 1 220 Fixture Hours 151  To select a DMX Source type    Edit Configuration x   1  Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and S  UIGH END SYSTEMS    double click on the line with DMX Source in the Name  column to bring up the edit dialog box        Choose a new configuration value    2  Choose between DMX512 and ArtNet as the source  DMx512      from the drop down list in the option field           Cancel      Edil Configuration    To Select a DMX Protocol type     1  Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and Fan END SYSTEMS    double click on the line with DMX Protocol in the Name  column to bring up the edit dialog box  Chose a new configuration value    2  Choose Standard  Dual  or Single from the drop   Standard  down list in the option field  xar dard          16 D
244. ts correctly     Default DMX Value  0   no  keystone correction has been  applied    Top Left X Top Right X    Top  Left Y Right Y  Bottom  Left Y Bottom    Right Y       2  Bottom Left X Bottom Right X  Original Content    Each corner has an x and a y value that adjust and correct scale of the projection from any  corner toward the image center on that axis     Setting all Keystone X and Y parameters DMX values to zero will place the four corners of the  image at the four corners of the projector output  Adjusting keystone x values toward 255   10096  moves the respective corner x positions horizontally toward the center of that image  edge  Adjusting keystone y values toward 255  100   causes the respective corner y positions  to be moved vertically toward the center of that edge of the image     Tip  These parameters can also be used to create interesting skewing as a design effect        Keystone Top Left X DMX value   85  Keystone Top Left Y DMX value   85    Keystone Top Right Y DMX value   170  All other Keystone parameter DMX values   25     Keystone Top Right X DMX value   85  Keystone Top Right Y DMX value   85       DL 2 User Manual    87    CHAPTER 10  Global Functions    X Ratio    The X Ratio Parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output  situations  This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image  horizontally     Default DMX Value  128  50     no adjustment    DMX value settings below the midpoint 
245. ts of three different    fixture types    in the Wholehog 3 library systems   This allows for ease of programming as well as the ability to adjust quickly for any of the various  DMX protocol options  There are three basic    fixtures    used to control a single DL 2 unit  The  Motion fixture type controls the actual moving yoke  projector  and integrated camera  The  Global fixture type controls the global graphic engine functions such as intensity  keystone  correction  viewpoint  etc  The Graphic fixture type controls each graphic object functions such  as Opacity  object  media  etc  The DL 2 protocol allows for 1  2  or 3 graphic objects  and the  Axon media server is a DL 2 fixture without the motion fixture type     In the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window of Wholehog software  add 1 motion  1 global   and 3 graphic    fixtures    for each complete DL 2 unit  The best way to organize your patching is  to assign user numbers for these items  Patch the motion first  the global second  and the  graphic fixture types last  For example  set up user numbers 1 5 that correspond to DL 2 fixture  number 1  where user number 1 is the motion  2 is the global  and 3 5 the graphic fixture types     DMX Output Displays    Although all lighting consoles output the same 512 DMX channels per universe  the on screen  labeling often differs  Parameter functions are displayed in either alpha numeric descriptions   strobe 1   percentage  0 100   or decimal  0 255 for 8 bit and 0 6553
246. tude  Texture Ripple  Vertical Amplitude  Texture Ripple  Circular    Ph d    25   Texture Ripple  Circular Asymmetrical Amplitude  Fi lect k   i  26 enramakey ine  select key color using Green Blue  Modifier channels       27 SHEOISNOY Medium  select key color using TOS Blue  Modifier channels  lect k   i  28 GhromAkey Coarse  select key color using Geen Blue  Modifier channels  i k    2 cnromakey Fine  Inverse select key color CS Blue  using Modifier channels  Chromakey Medium  Inverse select key color    le Green Blue  using Modifier channels  Chromakey Coarse  Inverse select key color    E Green Blue  using Modifier channels    Fades to  Scan Line converts image colors to colors in a Selects          converted Not used  single line of the image scan line i  image  T Wi 3  th    ran paren  ee er dais ln Selects center   Selects from 6  graphic to reveal another graphic positioned Area of wipe  Il of wipe wipe options  behind it  Direction and  Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture X twist center   Y twist center amount of  twist  Picture in picture duplicates the texture and X subpicture   X subpicture Subpicture  overlays it on the original center center size  Magnifying Len li herical    eid 9 dis oer bh db di   X lens center   Y lens center Lens size  that magnifies a portion of the texture  ifyi 2 li herical    Magnitying Ens RP bite see X lens center   Y lens center Lens size  that magnifies a portion of the texture     DL 2 User Manual 81    9  30  31    C2  NO
247. ty  gt  0 setting  looping continuously  Plays only when the content  opacity value is greater than zero           48 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 6  Graphic Functions  Defining Content    DMX       5   Pause and rewind Stops playback at the frame currently playing  then jumps to  the In Frame setting   EN Senb ln Brame Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame  parameter    Scnib Out Frame Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame  parameter  crubh Fame withistatistes Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame  parameter with media file data overlaid on the output     ob Out Eramewith siaisice Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame  parameter with media file data overlaid on the output     Scrubbing displays the selected frame of the composite output of the DL 2 fixture  While       scrubbing the In Frame  the frame selected by the In Frame coarse and fine channels will be  displayed  Likewise  scrubbing the Out Frame will display the frame selected by the Out Frame  coarse and fine channels  When the    with statistics    option is selected  the composite output  includes text data related to the selected frame  Remember that the In Frame and Out Frame  parameters are defined as a DMX value mapped to the percentage of the media file length  not  a specific frame     Note  Ifthe Global Control Mode parameter   255  a DMX value of 1 3 for the  Global Control parameter provides an alternate font color to enhance  statistics readab
248. ual    Table of Contents    User Manual c        i  Contacting  High End Systems B  uussdexce teextuek oo irite EXs aD eat da quA lone nies ii  Declaration  or CONMTORMILY  daga dearum eint da dibc bd debit bdurieama doomed ADU bd a idis iii  Product Modification Warning              sssssssssssssse meme enses IV  FCCLA IO NR S RE DT IV  Important Safety Information           cece cece cece erent emnes IV  erdeerqec     Xe                                  Q V  F  g Machine Warning  essstaaosbeexcad a toe nibnE FREE EREERREM RUE ddx aia ba E aam EN MR EE E RRdUE CE eas V  Packaged Media Notice               ssssssssssssssssss hee shes V  Warranty ieifiuncinle  RR Dm ANNEE V  c r c Tc    or      H               vi  What You Should Know About Copyright               sssssssessessee mens vii    Chapter 1  Product Overview  This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture and  the Content Management Application software     Features ieu udo x 36806 4G XR a2 A aua A l  cL FD T T at eee ee te aes 1  Grapini ENOM syiden OO TEES 2  Content Management Application                 sssssssssssssee nemen 2  VMAS  ee bas AA E E E E ES 2   Related Products and Optional Accessories                            eeee eene nnn nne 3    Chapter 2  Setup and Configuration  Hardware setup includes mounting  connecting to power and Ethernet and DMX  linking  Software setup includes launching the Content Management  Application  CMA  and configuration options     Hardware Setu
249. ue   255      Focus    The Focus parameter controls the fixture s mechanical focus from near  DMX value   0  to  far  DMX value   255      Zoom    This Zoom parameter controls the fixture   s mechanical zoom from narrow  DMX value   0  to  wide  DMX value   255         DL 2 User Manual 119    CHAPTER 12  Fixture Motion Functions    MSpeed  Motor Speed     The MSpeed parameter adjusts the time required for a motor to complete movement when  changing from one position to another  MSpeed provides a method for all motors to reach their  target position at the same time  even though each motor may have different distances to  travel  MSpeed movement is extremely smooth because the fixture controls movements  independent of DMX refresh rates     MSpeed times vary from 0 15 seconds to 252 7 seconds  In general  allowing the console to  crossfade the pan and tilt values for the DL2 fixture is acceptable  However  extremely slow  movements may require the use of Mspeed instead of console crossfades  For a listing of exact  MSpeed times  see    Appendix B  MSpeed Conversion Table        Control Function Options    The Control parameter remotely initiates various fixture operations and allows access to the  internal  projector menu controls     Fixture Operations  All of the following Fixture operation Control parameter settings  except for MSpeed Off    require the Dimmer be closed  DMX Value   0      DMX  Value Control Option Description  Range          120 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER
250. unction is ON  detecting ambient infrared light in the environment  The rest  of the DMX range turns the Auto adjustment off and adjusts the amount of IR illuminator  output from FULL  DMX value   128  to OFF  DMX value   255         DL 2 User Manual 125    CHAPTER 13  Live Video Input and Control    Camera Shutter   The DL 2 fixture   s internal camera can create slow motion and choppy frame effects using the  camera shutter options  The Camera Shutter parameter controls the camera shutter providing  six steps of frame rate control from 1 to 30 frames second  DMX values   0   63 set Full Auto  Exposure and is the suggested default option     White Balance Mode    The White Balance Mode parameter adjusts for variation in what is perceived as    White    in  different light conditions  The Auto White Balance mode computes the white balance value  output using color information from the entire image  It outputs the proper value using the color  temperature on a range of values from 3000 to 7500K and is the suggested default setting   Other settings for this parameter accommodate Indoor and Outdoor lighting conditions     Orientation   The Camera Orientation parameter can Vertically Invert  Flip  or Horizontally Invert  Mirror   the camera   s image being viewed by the camera  All four combinations of Vertical and  Horizontal Invert are available     Camera    ffects   The Camera Effects parameter provides several options for manipulating the camera   s image   This parameter pr
251. ure with the mounting bracket assembly that shipped with your  fixture and a safety cable attached  using the mounting bracket  to the fixture s base     WARNING   Before mounting  disconnect power to the fixture  If it has been  operating  allow the fixture to cool for five minutes before handling     Do not use C  Clamps to mount the DL 2 fixture to truss     AN    Use the following steps to mount a DL 2 fixture on a standard truss     1  Due to it   s size and weight  at least two people should support the fixture while another  attaches clamps and safety cables  Always stand on a firm  stable surface when mounting a    fixture to its support     2  Mount the clamps that shipped with fixture to the mounting brackets and then attach the  two mounting brackets to the base of the fixture using the provided quarter turn screws     Bracket screw holes                                                    8   amp  x o Safety o 3    i cable loop S    Oo o o                                  DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 2  Setup and Configuration    3  Tighten the clamps firmly to the  fixture   s base and to the support     4  Run the safety cable through the loop  on the fixture   s base  and around the  truss        X7    NN    NW    wh         then controlled by a DMX desk  The number of fixtures on a link will be determined by the  combined number of channels required by all the fixtures  The DMX channel range of a DL 2  fixture is determined by the protocol mode you choose     e 
252. ustomer Service    World Wide Web     High End Systems  Inc   2105 Gracy Farms Lane  Austin  TX 78758 USA  voice  512 836 2242  fax  512 837 5290  Toll Free  800 890 8989    High End Systems  Inc    2105 Gracy Farms Lane  Austin  TX 78758 USA   voice  800 890 8989   fax  512 834 9195   toll free  800 890 8989  email  support highend com    http   www highend com       DL 2 User Manual    Declaration of Conformity  according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104    Manufacturer s name  High End Systems  Inc   Distributor s name  High End Systems  Inc   Distributor s address  2105 Gracy Farms Lane    Austin  Texas 78758 USA    Declares that the product  Product Name  DL 2  Product Number  All  Product Options  All    conforms to the following EEC directives   73 23 EEC  as amended by 93 68 EEC  89 336 EEC  as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC    Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance  with the following standards in 2005     Safety  EN 60598 1  1997  EN 60598 2 17  1990  A1 A3  1998  A13  1999   EMC    EN 55022    Conducted Emissions Class A  Radiated Emissions Class A  ANSI C63 4 Class A  FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A  VCCI V 1 2001 04 Class A    EN 55024  EN 61000 4 2 A 8kV  EN 61000 4 3 Al 3V m  EN 61000 4 4 1kV 0 5kV  EN 61000 4 5 2kV 1kV  EN 61000 4 6 3 Vrms  EN 61000 4 11  gt 95  0 5p  3096 25p   9596 250p  EN 61000 3 2 Class A  EN 61000 3 3    USA  Monday  June 26  2006  Kenneth Stuart Hansen  Compliance Engineer       DL 2 U
253. video projection units  the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of  glycol fog  mineral oil  and smoke  The DL 2 fixture incorporates two stage air filtering to reduce these risks to  a minimum  however  the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture     e Air filters  both fixture and projector  should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis  When used in  a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used  we recommend at least a weekly check   e Do not situate DL 2 fixtures in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or  mineral oil hazer   e Minimize the exposure of DL 2 fixtures to both glycol fog and mineral oil   The DL 2 fixture is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is  used  rigged  and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment     Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance will void the warranty     Packaged Media Notice     Any use of this product other than consumer personal use in any manner that complies with the  MPEG 2 Standard for encoding video information for packaged media is expressly prohibited  without a license under applicable patents in the MPEG 2 patent portfolio  which license is  available from MPEG LA  L L C   250 Steele Street  Suite 300  Denver Colorado 80206     Warranty Information    Limited Warranty   Unless otherwise stated  your product  excluding th
254. wa 132 158 1 108 1 0 0 218 DL2  wm one  1  B  three 182 158 1103 1 0 0 218 DL2  m two  2  B one 182 168 1 104 1 0 0 218 Axor     2  All Configuration    Upgrading the CMA Software  Close the CMA before upgrading the CMA software  To Upgrade software   1  Download the latest version of the application from the Support section of the High End    Systems website  www highend com   A download wizard simplifies installation on your  personal computer     2  A dialog box will give you the option to Run or Save the application  Pressing Run  automatically un installs any existing CMA version on your hard drive and installs the new  version     Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software  DL 2 fixture software can only be uploaded to fixtures from the CMA  You must first save the  latest version of the DL 2 fixture software from the High End Systems website   www  highend com  to your hard drive and then use the CMA to upload it to the fixtures on  your link  To Upgrade DL 2 Fixture Software   1  Using your internet browser  select the latest version from the support section of the High  End Systems website  A dialog box will give you the option to Save     2  Select the location and press Save again to put a copy of the Fixture software on your  local drive     3  Click on All Servers in the left pane of CMA Management window     4  Right click anywhere in the CMA Window or use the Server   s pull down menu to select  Upgrade Software  The Upgrade Wizard will prompt you to browse to the locatio
255. window  2  Browse to the file or folder you want to upload on your hard drive and click on it to select   3  Drag and drop it into the appropriate User content folder  OR  4  Select Copy from the Edit drop down menu or the right click popup list     5  Select Paste from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click  popup list   As files are uploaded to fixtures  the User interface displays progress information and notifies  the user of any naming conflicts when files are renamed        136 DL 2 User Manual    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     A newly uploaded file or folder will have a default DMX value of zero  If a naming conflict  occurs  you will be prompted before overwriting the file       Mac OS X  File transfer  SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer  What this means is more than    EM  4GB of data may be transferred  but no file can be greater than 4GB in  size        Moving Files Between Fixtures    The CMA can transfer both individual files or entire folders between fixtures  The DMX values  assigned to the files are transferred along with the files themselves  You can also  simultaneously transfer files from one fixture to a group of fixtures        DL 2 User Manual 137    CHAPTER 14  Content Management Application  CMA     Archiving User Content    An Archive Image is a compressed file used to store media files  folders and object files along  with valid identification DMX values  This Content Archive is used to backup U
256. wise NON    Maximum Vertical angle clockwise   Posen C             ee a  colle  32768 EX 50  Maximum Vertical angle counterclockwise 65535    Maximum distance from origin in front of view  30260  49  54    Global View point    Look at point  center of universe  Look at point  graphic 1  Look at point  graphic 2  Look at point  graphic 3  Look at point  center of universe   m Viewpoint Look at point  graphic 1  Mode Look at point  graphic 2  Look at point  graphic 3  Look at point  center of universe  Look at point  graphic 1  Look at point  graphic 2  Look at point  graphic 3  Reserved  49  50                  O    Maximum distance from origin behind view target  65535    Global Control  Reserved 0 254  On screen frame statistics 255 NA    No control value utt    Provides alternate font color for viewability when 4 3 1  Control Mode  255          DL 2 User Manual 181    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Graphic 1 Functions   Standard  Dual  Single Protocol       Selects transparency level from completely      Opacity transparent  0  to opaque  255  uos    aie    Graphic 1 Content Definition    No selecton O   0  00   Fist Sock 3D Objet lat lane  tt  58   3 D Object File Additional Stock 3 D Objects 1 1  First User 3 D Objects 150  M Additional User Objects 151 255 elt    Mosen           9    Integrated video camera capture  The Media File 255  parameter is ignored    No selection  Media File First Media File  Additional Media Files 2 255      2 255     61 Defines the beginning
257. wise to the maximum horizontal angle  at a value of 65535  100    DMX values below the center move clockwise to the minimum  horizontal angle at a value of O     Vieuipoint Position Y    The Viewpoint Position Y parameter sets the vertical angle above below the horizontal plane   Pitch is another name for this component of the viewpoint position     Default DMX Value  32768   center    DMX values above the center of the range move counterclockwise to the maximum vertical  angle at a value of 65535  10096   DMX values below the center move clockwise to the  minimum vertical angle at a value of O     Vieuipoint Position Z  Zoom     The Viewpoint Position Z  Zoom  parameter is the distance from the view target  Zooming  toward the target  you can move through it and view it from the back side creating an mirror  image view of the composite object     Default DMX Value  30260   center  This default value is slightly less than midway through  the range to maintain some depth to the view of a composite image      DMX values above center move toward the maximum distance from origin in back of view target   a DMX value of 65535   DMX values below center move toward the maximum distance from  origin in front of view target at a value of zero        90 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter Il   Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Effects can be applied to the Media File content  texture  mapped onto a 3 D  object  Multiple Color and Geometric options are available in Effect Mode  Parameters for 
258. wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset    Sinewave  Vertical ui Z axis Wobbulation M Object Effect         Global Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   72    This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the  media file that is applied as a texture     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100        maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  of the wobble from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum offset       DL 2 User Manual 113    CHAPTER 11  Effect Mode Options Descriptions    Texture Ripple  Asymmetrical Circular  v   Object Effect MGlobal Effect  Effect Mode parameter DMX value   25    This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z   axis without affecting the underlying object to create an effect of wavy ripples moving out from  the object s center     Modifier 1  Adjusts the size  amplitude  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum size     Modifier 2  Adjusts the rate  frequency  of the ripple from 0   no adjustment to 255  100      maximum rate    Modifier 3  Adjusts the offset  phase  speed and direction  A DMX value of 128  5096  2 no  adjustment  DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255   10096    fastest sp
259. xels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue   RGB Add  non black pixels    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue    RGB Swap to GBR 7  Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    RGB Swap to BGR   Mod1   red  Mod2 green  Mod3  blue    Solarize 1  if color value   DMX value  invert color    Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize 2  if color value  gt  DMX  invert color   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solarize  if color value  lt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   Solarize 4  if color value  gt  DMX  set color to 0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue    DotP and Resample   Mod1  Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling     Color Cycle  DMX value controls cycle speed   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3   blue     All or Nothing  Color value greater than Mod  value  color   255  else color   0   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue     Solid Color RGB   Mod1  red  Mod2  green  Mod3  blue   RGB Invert   Mod1   red to inverted red  Mod2   green to  inverted green  Mod3   blue to inverted blue    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to GBR  Mod1   red to inverted green  Mod2   green to  inverted blue  Mod3   blue to inverted red    RGB Invert  amp  Swap to BRG  Mod1   red to inverted blue  Mod2   green to  inverted red  Mod3   blue to inverted green          212 DL 2 User Manual    APPENDIX A  DL 2 DMX Protocol    Edge Detect Color  Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2   vertical search  size  Mod3 comparison threshold    Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size  Mod2    vertical search siz
260. y  Frequency  Frequency   Green    Green cycle   Blue cycle  speed speed    Tiling On x axis scaler  Sinewave  Circular with x axis wobbulation Amplitude  Sinewave  Circular with y axis wobbulation  Amplitude    Sinewave  Horizontal with y axis AMI  wobbulation mpitude  Sinewave  Horizontal with z axis n  wobbulation mpiltude    Sinewave  Horizontal with x axis ACE  wobbulation mplituae    Glow Color Cycle Red cycle  speed             NM Sinewave  Circular with z axis wobbulation  Amplitude       76 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter 9     Graphic Functions  Synchronizing Content    After designating a master fixture with the Sync To parameter  you can  synchronize the content of other fixtures to any Object on the master in terms of    playback time  rotation or both     Synchronization Parameters    Sync Mode  The Sync Mode parameter defines the type of synchronization between Graphic Object  content  You can synchronize media file playback time between two objects  match or reverse    rotation or both     DMX Default Value  0   no sync type selection    VE Option  0 No selection  1 Synchronize playback time with object 1 media file  2 Synchronize playback time with object 2 media file  3 Synchronize playback time with object 3 media file  4 Synchronize rotation with object 1  5 Synchronize rotation with object 2  6 Synchronize rotation with object 3  7 Synchronize and reverse rotation with object 1  8 Synchronize and reverse rotation with object 2  9 Synchronize and reverse rotat
261. zing fixture   s media segment has a shorter sequence length than the master fixture   s  media file segment  it continuously repeats its sequence until the master fixture resets all the  clocks  If a synchronizing fixture   s media segment has a longer sequence length  it restarts at  the In Frame point before completing its entire sequence     Sync To  The Sync To parameter allows you to synchronize multiple DL 2 servers with one DL 2 server  as long as they are all on one network  The default applies to every server on the network     Default DMX Value  0   No synchronization    Each fixture on the network is assigned a fixture ID  The Sync To parameter setting selects the  ID of the fixture on the network that will provide the synchronization information to all other  fixtures on the network  Currently  synchronization can be with only one fixture  The  Synchronization server is selected with the Sync To parameter channel of Graphic Object One   The Sync To parameter channels for Graphic Objects 2 and 3 are reserved and default to O     Tip  For sync to work  all fixtures should be assigned a Unique Fixture ID  using the menu system  see DMX Control Screen on page 25  or  through the CMA  see Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration on  page 143         78 DL 2 User Manual    Chapter IO     Global Functions    Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or  three separate object graphics  You can adjust intensity  define masks  select a  po
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
  Manuel d`installation  Excalibur electronic 477 User's Manual  Central Hydraulics trencher 93167 User's Manual  JB Burner O&M Manual - Webster Engineering  UD_BCP-7000 Créateur d`application y Manuel d`utilisation    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file